T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SECTION 072400 – EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes, but is not limited to the following: Direct applied EIFS soffit system consisting of
vapor barrier (VB), base coat, reinforcing mesh and finish coat applied to glass mat faced gypsum board.
The glass mat faced gypsum board is attached to framing in weather protected areas such as soffits and
ceilings.
1.
This system is intended for use in commercial construction.
2.
Provide movement joints in perimeter against dissimilar materials and at a 30’ on center spacing.
Joints are to extend thru the framing and sheathing substrate.
3.
Heavy texture finishes is preferred and provide two coats of base coat to minimize the effects of
planar irregularities and to improve appearance of the textured finish.
4.
Provide joints at areas of stress and at intervals to accommodate thermal movement as with
conventional stucco assemblies.
B.
As a no cost option, the Contractor may provide an aluminum metal soffit material manufactured by the
roof system manufacturer, in lieu of the EIFS system specified for the soffit panel. Refer to Division 07
Metal Roof Panels for specification information. The aluminum metal soffit panels will be installed over
CFMF framing, exterior sheathing, and a continuous vapor barrier.
Related Sections:
1.
DIVISION 01 – Specification
2.
DIVISION 03 – Pre-Cast Structural Concrete
3.
DIVISION 05 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing
4.
DIVISION 07 – Metal Roof Panels
5.
DIVISION 07 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
6.
DIVISION 07 – Joint Sealants
7.
DIVISION 09 – Gypsum Board
C.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM Standards:
1.
C 150 - Specification for Portland Cement
2.
C 297 - Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions
3.
C 1177 - Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum for Use as Sheathing
4.
D 1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
5.
D 3273 - Test for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an
Environmental Chamber
6.
E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Material
7.
E 2486 - Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior Insulation and Finish
Systems (EIFS)
8.
G 153 - Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without
Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
B.
Gypsum Association:
1.
GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual
2.
GA-253 Application of Gypsum Sheathing
3.
GA-254 Fire Resistant Gypsum Sheathing
C.
ICC Evaluation Service
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 1
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
1.
1.3
AC 59, Acceptance Criteria for Direct-Applied Exterior Finish Systems (DEFS)
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design for maximum allowable system deflection, normal to the plane of the soffit, of L/360.
1.
Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements.
2.
Positive and Negative Wind-Load Performance: Capability to withstand wind load requirements
required by the International Building Code, NJ Edition, 2009.
B.
Design minimum 3/8 inch wide expansion joints in the system where they exist in the substrate or
supporting construction, at a minimum of every 30 feet up to a maximum area of 900ft2, and where the
system adjoins dissimilar construction or materials. If the soffit board manufacturer has more stringent
requirements follow the board manufacturer’s recommendations.
Design minimum 3/8 inch (9 mm) wide perimeter sealant joints at the soffit/wall transition and around all
penetrations through the system (lights, vents, etc.).
Specify compatible backer rod and sealant, or suitable accessories for system terminations or joints.
C.
D.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
System Performance
Test
Method
Criteria
Result
Impact Resistance
ASTM E 2486
High: 90 to 150 in-lbs (10.2 to
17.0J)
Achieved: One layer of Sto
Mesh
Adhesion
ASTM C-297
Minimum 10 psi
Passed
Adhesion after 10
Freeze/Thaw Cycles
ASTM C-297
Minimum 10 psi
Passed
B.
Component Performance - Finishes
Test
Method
Criteria
Result
Accelerated Weathering
ASTM G-153
No deleterious effects* at
2000 hours when viewed under 5x magnification
Passed
Freeze/Thaw Resistance
ICC-ES AC 59
No deleterious effects* at 10
cycles
Passed
Mildew Resistance
ASTM D-3273
No growth supported during
28 day exposure period
Passed
No growth at 28 days
Surface Burning
ASTM E-84
All Components Flame
Spread less than 25,
Smoke Developed less than
450
Passed
C.
* No deleterious effects: no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling or
delamination.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 2
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.6
Procedure: Comply with submittal requirements indicated below and as stipulated in 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each component of system specified, including
product specifications and installation instructions.
1.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications, application
instructions, product storage and handling requirements, and similar data for each product
specified below as required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and provide
complete application information.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, fasteners, and
attachments to other work.
Samples: For each product provide color and texture samples requested by Architect.
1.
Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color sheets and small-scale samples indicating
manufacturer's full range of colors and textures for selection by Architect.
2.
Verification: Submit 8-inch x 8-inch samples for each finish, color, and texture selected; prepare
samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Field quality-control test reports.
Product certificates and test reports.
Research / evaluation reports.
Maintenance data.
Sustainability / Environmental Submittals: Show evidence including but not limited to the following:
1.
Sustainability / Environmental Submittals: Show evidence including, but not limited to the following:
2.
Recycled content – documentation showing product supports pre and post - consumer content.
3.
Indoor Environmental Quality - product is VOC compliant in the state and jurisdiction the project
is located.
4.
Proposed products are manufactured within a 500-mile radius of the project site and are considered to be a locally produced material which supports regional materials and resources.
5.
Comply with recycling program and waste management procedures.
J.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with the applicable sections noted in DIVISION 1, including but
limited to the following:
1.
Requirements of 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES;
2.
Submission of maintenance instructions described in 017823 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA;
3.
Record documents as described in 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS;
4.
Demonstration and training requirements indicated in 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
K.
Quality Control Submittals:
1.
Qualifications Certification: Submit written certification or similar documentation signed by
applicable subcontractor, Prime Contractor and manufacturer indicating compliance with
applicable “Qualifications” requirements specified below.
2.
Installer Experience Listing: Submit list of completed projects using products proposed for this
Project, including owner’s contact and telephone number for each project, demonstrating
compliance with requirements specified below.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 3
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
A.
Manufacturer requirements:
1.
System manufacturer for a minimum of twenty five (25) years.
2.
ISO 9001:2008 Certified Quality System.
3.
ISO 14001:2004 Certified Environmental Management System
4.
Firm regularly engaged in manufacturing products for specified systems, and with at least five (5)
years successful experience in applications similar to that required for this Project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by manufacturer to install manufacturer's system using
trained workers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
D.
E.
1.7
Engaged in application of the specified Finish System for Soffits or similar systems for a
minimum of three (3) years.
Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of specified materials and the installation of plaster
soffit and ceiling assemblies.
Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in plastering application for
soffits, and familiar with the requirements of the specified work.
Successful completion of minimum three (3) projects of similar size and complexity to the
specified project.
Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job site to install the system in
compliance with the manufacturer’s published specifications and details and the project plans and
specifications.
Source Limitations: Obtain products through one source from a single manufacturer and from sources
approved by the manufacturer as compatible with system components.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
Build mockups specified for systems specified.
2.
Locate 4 ft. x 4 ft. panels with all system components and expansion joint assemblies on Site in
location as directed by Architect, and demonstrate proposed range of color, texture, and
workmanship expected in completed work.
3.
Obtain Architect's review of mock-ups before start of final work; retain and maintain mock-ups
during construction for comparison with completed work until removal is directed by Architect.
4.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
Pre-installation Conference: As required by Architect, conduct conference at Project site. Perform a preinstallation meeting / conference and coordinate installation with CFMF systems, gypsum board systems,
precast wall panels, metal roof systems, and other necessary systems. Refer to Division 01, Project
Management and Coordination specification.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
1.8
Provide a minimum warranty as follows: Exterior Soffit - (10) year warranty – EIFS System or approved
equal.
The manufacturer’s warranty is to include material and labor costs to replace system in the event of
defects.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Issue tests to Architect and Owner’s Representative.
Inspections
1.
Provide independent third party inspection.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 4
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2.
1.9
Conduct inspections in accordance with code requirements, contract documents, and to fulfill
warranty requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.10
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.11
A.
Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original, unopened packages with manufacturer's labels
identifying products legible and intact.
Storage and Protection: Store materials inside and under cover; keep dry and protected from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, damage from
construction traffic, and other causes. Stack insulation flat and off ground.
Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing and temperatures in excess of 90°F (32° C). Store away
from direct sunlight.
Protect portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and humidity. Store under cover
and off the ground in a dry location.
Store gypsum board materials inside and protect from damage by the elements. Protect ends, edges, and
faces of boards from damage and surface contamination.
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor temperatures are 38 deg. F. and
falling, unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above 38
deg. F. during installation of wet materials and for 24 hours after installation or longer to allow them to
become thoroughly dry and weather-resistant. Prior to installation, insure wall is free of moisture.
Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40°F (4°C) during application and for 24 hours after
set of base coat and finish materials.
Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40°F (4°C) such that required
temperatures are maintained. Prevent concentration of heat on the uncured base coat and finish coat and
vent fumes and other products of combustion to the outside to prevent contact with the base coat and
finish coat.
Provide protection of soffit board, base coat, or primed base coat from contact with oils, salts, or other
surface contamination from the atmosphere that could adversely affect adhesion.
Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of materials.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Sequence installation of system with related work specified in other sections to ensure that wall
assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are protected against damage from weather, aging,
corrosion, and other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for EIFS is based on The STO Corporation for the following
locations:
1.
Exterior Soffit System: Sto Quik Gold Soffit system or approved equal consisting of base coat,
reinforcing mesh and finish coat applied to glass mat faced gypsum board. The glass mat faced
gypsum board is attached to framing in weather protected areas such as soffits.
2.
Other Equivalent Products include:
a.
Provide Dryvit;
b.
Or approved equal.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 5
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, vapor barrier, trim, fasteners, reinforcing meshes, base and
finish coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use
by EIFS manufacturer for Project.
System Description:
1.
Exterior Soffit System over Sheathing:
a.
CFMF Framing
b.
Exterior Sheathing
c.
Vapor Barrier - Sto Guard with Vapor Seal
d.
Reinforcing Mesh – Standard Sto Mesh and Sto Detail Mesh
e.
Base Coat - Sto BTS – Plus (2) two layers to prevent telegraphing.
f.
Primer – Sto Primer
g.
Sto Finish – As selected by Architect from full range of options.
CFMF Framing: Support EIFS system using CFMF framing system designed by a licensed engineer in
the state the project resides in. Provide calculations and supporting documentation noting the system is
designed to withstand the wind load pressures required for the region. CFMF framing to be a minimum
of approximately 2.5” CFMF framing @ appropriate spacing for project conditions, max 24” o.c. with
cross bracing back to the building structural system @ 48” o.c. max. Gauge and size of framing to be
determined by the design engineer requirements. Minimum gage to be 18 gauge or greater.
Exterior Sheathing:
1.
Manufacturer – Georgia Pacific, or approved equal.
2.
Product – Dens Glass Gold Exterior Sheathing panels for exterior soffit and wall system or
approved equal.
3.
Thickness – Minimum 5/8” thick Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board complying with ASTM C 1177,
similar to Dens Glass Gold by GP or approved equal, see Division 07.
4.
Fastening - Fastened boards to framing @ 16” oc max. Comply with wind load requirements for
high wind zone area.
5.
Installation – Install in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements to meet wind load
requirements and maintain warranty of system.
Vapor Barrier - Primary Air Barrier Material: StoGuard VaporSeal or approved equal - ready-mixed
flexible spray or roller applied waterproof air barrier and vapor barrier membrane material.
1.
Accessory Materials:
a.
Joint and Rough Opening Treatments
1)
Sto Gold Fill with StoGuard Mesh: ready mixed flexible trowel or spray applied air
barrier material, or approved equal.
2)
StoGuard Rapid Seal™ with StoGuard Mesh: moisture cure elastomeric waterproof
air barrier material (mesh not required at rough openings), or approved equal.
3)
Sto VaporSeal with StoGuard Fabric: flexible waterproof air barrier and vapor
barrier membrane material, or approved equal.
4)
StoGuard Tape: self-adhering rubberized asphalt tape with polyester fabric facing
(for rough openings only), or approved equal.
b.
Joint Reinforcements
1)
StoGuard Mesh: nominal 4.2 oz/yd2 (142 g/m2) self-adhesive, flexible,
symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber reinforcing mesh, with alkaline resistant coating
for compatibility with Sto materials, or approved equal.
2)
StoGuard Fabric: non-woven integrally reinforced cloth reinforcement, or approved
equal.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 6
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3)
StoGuard RediCornerTM: non-woven integrally reinforced pre-formed cloth, or
approved equal.
c.
Transition Membrane
1)
StoGuard Transition Membrane - flexible air barrier membrane for continuity at
transitions: sheathing to foundation, dissimilar materials (CMU to frame wall), wall
to balcony floor slab or ceiling, flashing shingle lap transitions, floor line deflection
joints, masonry control joints, and through wall joints in masonry or frame
construction, or approved equal.
d.
Sealant
1)
StoGuard RapidSeal – one component rapid drying waterproof air barrier material
for sealing fish mouths, wrinkles, seams, gaps, holes, or other voids in StoGuard air
barrier materials, or approved equal.
Primers
1)
StoGuard Primer: rubber resin emulsion primer for use with StoGuard Tape to
enhance adhesion and allow installation down to 35 degrees F, or approved equal.
e.
f.
Auxiliary Materials
1)
Wet sealant: Refer to Division 07
2)
Pre-cured sealant tape: Dow 123 or approved equal
3)
Spray adhesive: 3M Super 77 Spray Adhesive or approved equal
4)
Spray foam: Dow Great Stuff for Gaps and Cracks or approved equal
g.
Patching and Leveling Material for Concrete and Masonry
1)
Sto Leveler: polymer modified cementitious patch and leveling material for
prepared concrete and masonry surfaces for up to 3/8 inch or approved equal.
2)
Sto BTS Xtra: polymer modified lightweight cementitious patch and leveling
material for prepared concrete and masonry surfaces for up to 1/8 inch or approved
equal.
F.
Reinforcing Mesh:
1.
Sto Mesh or approved equal - nominal 4.5 oz./yd2 (153 g/m2), symmetrical, interlaced open-weave
glass fiber fabric made with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials.
2.
Sto Detail Mesh or approved equal - nominal 4.2 oz/yd2 (143 g/m2), flexible, symmetrical,
interlaced glass fiber fabric, with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility with Sto materials.
G.
Base Coat – (2) Two Layers - Sto BTS Plus, one-component, polymer-modified, cement based high build
base coat with less than 33 percent portland cement content by weight.
Primer: (Provide Primer based on finish and texture selection by Architect)
1.
Sto Primer Sand or approved equal - acrylic based tinted primer for roller application.
2.
Sto Primer Smooth or approved equal - acrylic based tinted primer for roller or spray application.
H.
I.
Finish-Coat Materials: Standard acrylic-based coating similar to STO-LIT Finish: as required for system
specified.
1.
Textures: Texture to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of options. 1.5
Medium Texture by STO is preferred or approved equal. Final selection made by Architect after
submission of samples.
2.
Color: as scheduled on drawings, if not scheduled, color will be selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors.
J.
Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion resistant; consisting of standard washer attachments and fastener
suitable for substrate for vinyl trim accessories thru sheathing and framing.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 7
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
K.
Trim Accessories: Standard trim accessories acceptable to the system manufacturer to make system
complete and comply with the manufacturer’s warranty. Provide starter trim / track made of PVC with
perforated edge. Size as required by field conditions. Casing bead, expansion and control joint
accessories. Accessories shall be vinyl (ASTM D 1784, cell classification 13244C), shall encase the
terminating edge of the soffit board, and shall have perforated flanges for keying of the base coat/mesh
materials to the soffit board surface (example, Vinyl Corp. or approved equal). Submit products to be
used with system for review and approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which products are to be installed in coordination
with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify General Contractor in
writing, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner, and Architect, of any conditions detrimental
to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
When Installer confirms conditions as acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation and to ensure
requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied, submit to General Contractor written
confirmation, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner, and Architect, from applicable Installer.
Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will be assumed to indicate conditions
are acceptable to Installer.
1.
Inspect sheathing application for compliance with manufacturer’s minimum installation
requirements.
2.
Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might
adversely affect the installation to the General Contractor. Do not install EIFS system materials
until deviations are corrected.
INSTALLATION EIFS (Direct Coat)
A.
B.
C.
General: Install EIFS System to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions applicable to products
and application for each type of substrate. Extend EIFS System in thickness indicated to entire area to
receive system. Remove projections that conflict with placement of system.
Sheathing: Refer to Division 07 – Gypsum Board for exterior sheathing. Replace weather damaged
sheathing and repair damaged or cracked surfaces.
1.
Inspect sheathing surfaces for:
a.
Remove Contamination - algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus,
grease, laitance, mildew or other foreign substances.
b.
Cracks - measure crack width and record location of cracks.
c.
Repair damage and deterioration.
d.
Moisture content and moisture damage - use a moisture meter to determine if the surface is
dry enough to receive the coatings and record any areas of moisture damage.
e.
Compliance with specification tolerances - record areas that are out of tolerance (greater
than 1/4 inch in 10-0 feet deviation in plane).
Base Coat Application
1.
Apply base coat over the sheathing with proper spray equipment or a stainless steel trowel to a
uniform thickness of approximately 1/16 inch. Apply base coat in strips of 40 inches and
immediately embed reinforcing mesh into the wet base coat by troweling from the center to the
edge of the mesh. Avoid wrinkles in the mesh. Overlap the mesh minimum 2-1/2 inches at mesh
joints and stagger mesh overlaps minimum 8 inches from sheathing joints.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 8
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2.
3.
Install base coat and mesh over perforated flanges of accessories. Do not install base coat and
mesh over unperforated accessory flanges.
The mesh must be fully embedded so that no mesh color shows through the base coat when it is
dry. Feather mesh overlaps to avoid reading the mesh through the finish coating. Allow base coat
to thoroughly dry before applying primer or finish.
D.
Finish Coat Application
1.
Apply finish directly over the primed base coat only after the base coat/primer has thoroughly
dried. Apply the finish by spraying, or troweling with a stainless steel trowel, depending on finish
specified. General rules for application of finishes are as follows:
a.
Avoid application in direct sunlight.
b.
Apply finish in a continuous application, always working to a wet edge.
c.
Weather conditions affect application and drying time. Hot or dry conditions limit working
time and accelerate drying and may require adjustments in the scheduling of work to
achieve desired results; cool or damp conditions extend working time and retard drying and
may require added measures of protection against wind, dust, dirt, rain and freezing. Adjust
work schedule and provide protection.
d.
Do not install finish on accessories. Install only over reinforced base coat or primed
reinforced base coat.
e.
Float "R" (rilled texture) with a plastic trowel to achieve their rilled texture or approved
equal.
f.
Do not install separate batches of finish side-by-side.
g.
Do not apply finish over irregular or unprepared surfaces, or surfaces not in compliance
with the project specifications.
E.
Sealant Installation
1.
Seal all open joints in the finish system or penetrations into the soffit space with appropriate
sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent any water from
getting into or behind the system. Refer to Division 07 for products.
F.
Accessory and Joint Installation
1.
Install appropriate casing bead and joint accessories at system terminations in accordance with
locations indicated or required to achieve conditions on contract documents. Maintain a gap of
minimum 3/8" between the accessory and abutments with dissimilar construction to form a sealant
joint.
2.
Follow accessory manufacturer's instructions for accessory butt joints to maintain water tightness.
3.
Provide expansion joints in sheathing at minimum intervals of 30 feet up to a maximum area of
900 square feet, wherever the system abuts dissimilar construction or an existing joint occurs in
construction. Fit sheathing snugly into accessories prior to attachment.
G.
Vapor Barrier Installation
1.
Surface Preparation Sheathing
a.
Remove and replace damaged sheathing.
b.
Spot surface defects such as over-driven fasteners, knot holes, or other voids in sheathing
with knife grade joint treatment material.
c.
Spot fasteners with knife grade or coating joint treatment material.
d.
Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing in compliance with ASTM C 1177.
e.
Coordinate work with other trades to ensure air barrier continuity with connections at
foundation, floor lines, flashings, lintels and shelf angles, openings and penetrations such as
pipes, vents, windows and doors, masonry anchors, rafters or beams, joints in construction,
projections such as decks and balconies, and roof line.
f.
Transition Membrane Detailing: detail transition areas with Transition Membrane to
achieve barrier continuity. For illustrations of installation, including complex geometries
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 9
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
g.
2.
such as inside and outside corners, refer to the Manufacturers Guide Details
(www.stocorp.com).
Floor line deflection joints up to 1 inch wide, static joints and transitions – sheathing to
foundation, dissimilar materials (CMU to frame wall), flashing shingle lap transitions, wall
to balcony floor slab or ceiling:
1)
Apply waterproof coating liberally to properly prepared surfaces with brush, roller,
or spray.
2)
Place pre-cut lengths of Transition Membrane centered over the transition in the wet
coating. At changes in plane crease the membrane and similarly place the
membrane material in the wet coating.
3)
Immediately top coat the membrane with additional coating and apply pressure with
brush or roller to fully embed the membrane in the coating and achieve a smooth
and wrinkle-free surface without gaps or voids.
4)
Apply coating liberally along all top horizontal edges on walls and along all edges
on balcony floor slabs to fully seal the edges.
5)
Overlap minimum 2 inches at ends and adhere lap seams together with coating.
Shingle lap vertical seams and vertical to horizontal intersections with minimum 2
inch overlap.
h.
Movement joints up to 1 inch (25 mm) wide and up to + 50% movement: masonry control
joints, through wall joints in masonry or frame construction
1)
Insert backer rod sized to friction fit in the joint (diameter 25% greater than joint
width).
2)
Recess the backer rod uniformly from the face of the joint ¼ inch for joints with +
25% movement, 3/8 inch for joints with +37.5% movement, or ½ inch for joints
with + 50% movement.
3)
Apply the waterproof coating liberally to properly prepared surfaces with brush,
roller, or spray along each side of the joint.
4)
Immediately place the membrane by looping it into the joint against the backer rod
surface to provide slack.
5)
Embed the membrane in the wet coating along the sides of the joint by top coating
with additional coating material and applying pressure with a brush or roller.
i.
After the membrane installation is complete and the waterproof coating is dry:
1)
Apply a final liberal coat of the waterproof coating to all top horizontal edges on
walls to ensure waterproofing integrity. Similarly apply coating at all edges on
balcony floor slabs.
2)
Inspect the installed membrane for fish mouths, wrinkles, gaps, holes or other
deficiencies. Correct fish mouths or wrinkles by cutting, then embedding the area
with additional coating applied under and over the membrane.
3)
Seal gaps, holes, and complex geometries at three dimensional corners with
approved waterproof coating / membrane.
j.
Opening Protection
1)
Install rough opening protection into and around rough openings. Refer to
manufacturer’s details and applicable manufacturer’s product bulletins.
k.
Sheathing Joints
1)
Install joint treatment material with applicable reinforcement over sheathing joints.
Refer to manufacturer’s details and applicable manufacturer’s product bulletins.
Waterproof Air Barrier Membrane Installation To Sheathing
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 10
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
a.
b.
3.
Field Quality Control
a.
Owner’s qualified testing agency shall perform inspections and tests.
b.
Inspections: air barrier materials are subject to inspection to verify compliance with
requirements.
1)
Condition of substrates and substrate preparation.
2)
Installation of primary air barrier material, accessory materials, and compatible
auxiliary materials over structurally sound substrates and in conformance with
architectural design details, contractor’s shop drawings, project mock-up, and
manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
3)
Air barrier continuity and connections without gaps and holes at foundation, floor
lines, flashings, lintels and shelf angles, openings and penetrations such as pipes,
vents, windows and doors, masonry anchors, rafters or beams, joints in
construction, projections such as decks and balconies, and roof line.
c.
Tests: air barrier materials and assembly are subject to tests to verify compliance with
performance requirements:
1)
Qualitative air leakage test: ASTM E 1186
2)
Quantitative air leakage test: ASTM E 779, E 783, and E 1827
3)
Adhesion test: ASTM D 4541
4)
Qualitative adhesion and compatibility testing: wet sealant manufacturer’s field
quality control adhesion test.
d.
Repair non-conforming substrates and barrier material installation to conform with system
requirements to fulfill warranty.
Take corrective action to repair and replace, or reinstall materials, seal openings, gaps, or
other sources of air leakage to conform with project performance requirements.
e.
4.
3.3
Airless spray application – Apply air barrier to the prepared substrate in accordance with
the manufacturer’s installation requirements. Spray a minimum of 46 wet mils (25 dry
mils). Apply a first pass in a vertical up and down motion, then a second pass in a side-toside motion to build up film thickness and to achieve A VOID AND PINHOLE FREE
SURFACE.
Roller application – Apply a minimum of 2 uniform coats with a ¾ inch nap roller to
achieve a minimum 25 dry mils and a void and pinhole free surface. Additional coats may
be required to achieve mil thickness depending on substrate, application technique, and
temperature and humidity conditions.
Protection And Cleaning
a.
Protect air and vapor barrier materials from damage during construction caused by wind,
rain, freezing, continuous high humidity, or prolonged exposure to sun light.
b.
Protect air and vapor barrier materials from damage from trades, vandals, and water
infiltration during construction.
c.
Repair damaged materials to meet project specification requirements.
d.
Clean spills, stains, soiling from finishes or other construction materials that will be
exposed in the completed work with compatible cleaners.
e.
Remove all masking materials after work is completed.
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
B.
Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them.
Provide protection of installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, freezing and continuous high
humidity until they are fully dry.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 11
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Project EIFS system form damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended
by manufacturer of affected construction.
Protect EIFS from exposure to the elements as required by the manufacturer.
Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials that would be exposed in
the completed work using procedures as recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Protect EIFS to avoid damage from other trades, and construction materials during subsequent
operations as recommended by manufacturer.
2.
Schedule work to ensure that the EIFS system is covered as soon as possible after installation.
3.
Protect EIFS system from damage during subsequent operations.
Dispose of all debris legally and in accordance with local jurisdiction requirements.
Comply with waste management and recycling program requirements.
END OF SECTION
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
072400 – Page 12
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes, but is not limited to the following:
1.
Low Sloped installation metal roofing.
2.
Structural Standing Seam Sheet Metal Roofing.
3.
Factory formed metal roof panels: Standing-seam, hidden fastener, and insulated.
4.
Finish must conform to the "Metal Construction Association Certified Premium Painted™"
standard.
5.
Prefinished, prefabricated structural standing seam roof system with continuous interlocking
formed seams.
6.
Coordinate with installation of roofing substructure.
7.
Provide color coordinated hip, gable, and valley flashings, ridge and peak caps, eave and shelf
drips, and counter flashings.
8.
Fascia, roof coping edge, gutters, and downspouts.
9.
Downspout Shoes.
10.
Gutter Guards.
11.
Metal roofing and associated flashing, clips, fasteners, closures necessary to form a weather-tight
roof panel system as shown on the contract drawings and/or specified herein.
12.
Individual panels shall be removable for replacement without disturbing the rest of the panels.
13.
As a no cost option, the Contractor may provide an aluminum metal soffit material manufactured
by the roof system manufacturer, in lieu of the EIFS system specified for the soffit panel. Refer to
Division 07 EIFS specification. The aluminum metal soffit panels will be installed over CFMF
framing, exterior sheathing, and a continuous vapor barrier.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 01 – Specifications
2.
Division 05 – Structural Steel
3.
Division 05 – Steel Deck
4.
Division 06 – Rough Carpentry
5.
Division 07 – Joint Sealants
6.
Division 07 – Insulation Panels
7.
Division 07 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
8.
Division 07 – Roof Accessories
9.
Division 07 – Snow Guards
10.
Division 07 – Joint Sealants
11.
Division 10 – Bird Control
12.
Division 01 – Quality Assurance and Control
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
UL 790/ASTM E 108
ASTM E 283
ASTM E 331
ASTM E 330, Field Tested
UL 2218
ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rating
Paint Performance Tests, ICBO AC166 Penetration
AAMA 2605,
MCA Roofing Certification or approved equal.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 1
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
1.3
Certified to ISO 9001:2008 with design.
Comply with ASTM E 1514.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA Waterproofing Manual that apply to the
design, dimensions (pan width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of
installation indicated.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association; 1998.
ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007.
ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding
Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E1680 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel
Systems
ASCE-7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
UL 263 Standard for Safety for fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies
Energy Star Compliant
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
1.4
General: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified as
determined by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project, by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Wind-Uplift Resistance:
1.
Code Requirements for Design Uplift Pressures: Comply with applicable requirements of New
Jersey Uniform Building Code including applicable 2009 International Building Code – New
Jersey Edition, and the following criteria per ASCE 7. Refer to structural drawings for design
criteria of the project location.
2.
Provide roofing system designed to resist basic wind speed (3-second gust) of 100 to 110 mph at
33 ft above ground min.
3.
Roof manufacturer to design system to resist wind pressures at corners and edges, and the field
areas to meet code requirements.
4.
Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of
positive gravity/live loads and negative wind uplift design pressures and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated herein, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592. Provide clips,
fasteners, and clip spacing of type tested and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
minimum load equal to 1.65 times the design negative uplift pressure. Manufacturer to provide
supporting documentation on fastener type, spacing and frequency with submittals to conform
with the performance requirements. Fasten system to metal deck or structural system.
5.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Capable of producing sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with
UL 580 for Class 90 wind-uplift resistance.
6.
Meet the design requirements required in the jurisdiction the project is located. In addition,
system will maintain current state of Florida Product Approval for wind speeds noted above. This
is required to establish a minimum level of performance expected of the roof panel system.
7.
Product selection must contribute to sustainability goals for new construction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Procedure: Comply with submittal requirements indicated below and as stipulated in 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 2
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications, application instructions,
product storage and handling requirements, and similar data for each product specified below as required
to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and provide complete application information.
1.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for each type of metal roof panel and accessory, including each type of
underlayment product indicated:
2.
Concealed fastener, standing seam metal roof panels and accessories.
3.
Underlayment.
C.
Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal roofing, including plans, elevations, and keyed references
to termination points. All fastening patterns shall be clearly designated to meet the specified wind speed
requirements. For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Include details for forming, joining, and securing sheet metal roofing, including pattern of seams,
termination points, expansion joints, roof penetrations, edge conditions, special conditions,
connections to adjoining work, and accessory items.
2.
Submit shop drawings indicating thickness and dimensions of parts, fastenings and anchoring
methods, details and locations of seams, transitions and other provisions necessary for thermal
expansion and contraction.
3.
Indicate roof terminations, clearly showing flashings and change of direction caps.
4.
Clearly indicate locations of field and factory applied sealant.
5.
Show locations and types of elevated hold-down clips and fasteners. Include load path
documentation and fastener requirements for roof system to structure / roof deck below. Adjust
fastener length as required. Fastening of bearing plates and clips is preferred with corrosion
resistant hex head fasteners in stainless steel or approved equal.
6.
Provide plan showing layout of entire roof.
7.
Provide seaming layout of all accessories.
8.
Shop Drawings must be provided by the Metal Roof Manufacturer.
D.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal sheet roofing indicated to comply with performance requirements
and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified New Jersey professional
engineer responsible for their preparation. Calculations to include fastening pattern and fastener type
required for the application.
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale and coordinating roof mounted devices, penetrations
and roof-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
Roof panels and attachments.
2.
Purlins, rafters, and metal framing supporting structure including trusses.
3.
Roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations,
lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items mounted on roof curbs.
4.
Snow Guards.
5.
Electrical – Lightning Protection for fastening, wire routes, and mounting locations and methods.
6.
Mechanical and Plumbing – for roof penetrations and flashing conditions.
E.
F.
Samples: For each exposed finish submit two samples, 12" long x full width panel, showing proposed
metal gauge and seam profile.
1.
Submit standard color samples of metal for Architect’s selection.
2.
Submit elevated panel clip.
3.
Submit a sample of each product used in the system.
G.
Field quality control inspection reports, to be submitted for warranty program level specified.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Inspections / Reports: Provide a minimum of three visits during the course
of project. Visits are to be made as work progresses. Field reports indicate date of visit,
procedures followed, progress of work, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 3
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
application, and supplementary instructions given. Provide a copy of the manufacturer’s field
reports to Architect and Owner.
H.
Product test reports. Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,
for the following:
1.
Submit test reports prepared by (UL) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. indicating wind uplift rating
of proposed roof system.
2.
Metal Roof Panels: Include reports for UL 790/ASTM E 108, UL 580, ASTM E 1680 , ASTM E
1646, ASTM E 1592, UL 2218, ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Rating, Paint Performance Tests,
ICBO AC166 Penetration, AAMA 2605, Florida Building Code Approval, MCA Roofing
Certification.
3.
Insulation and Vapor Retarders: Include reports for thermal resistance, fire-test-response
characteristics, water-vapor transmission, and water absorption.
I.
J.
K.
Maintenance data.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
Sustainability / Environmental Submittals: Show evidence including but not limited to the following:
1.
Provide a list of installed roofing material with a minimum Solar Reflectance Value of: 78 or
approved equal.
a.
Solar Reflectance for Roofs with Slopes of 2:12 or Less: Initial solar reflectance of not less
than 0.65 when tested according to ASTM E 903, and maintained, under normal
conditions, solar reflectance of not less than 0.50 for 3 years after installation.
b.
Solar Reflectance for Roofs with Slopes Steeper Than 2:12: Initial solar reflectance of not
less than 0.25 when tested according to ASTM E 903, and maintained, under normal
conditions, solar reflectance not less than 0.15 for 3 years after installation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
1.5
Recycled content – documentation showing product supports pre and post - consumer content.
Indoor Environmental Quality - product is VOC compliant in the state and jurisdiction the project
is located.
Proposed products are manufactured within a 500-mile radius of the project site and are
considered to be a locally produced material which supports regional materials and resources.
Comply with recycling program and waste management procedures.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with the applicable sections noted in DIVISION 1, including but
limited to the following:
1.
Requirements of 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES;
2.
Submission of maintenance instructions described in 017823 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA;
3.
Record documents as described in 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS;
4.
Demonstration and training requirements indicated in 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Installer Qualifications: Installer of sheet metal roofing for a minimum of ten (10) years.
Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum of ten (10) years. factory forming
experience.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548.
Single Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels, custom trims and flashings, and custom
fabricated items including gutters, downspouts, vapor barrier, and roof edge products through a one
source from a single manufacturer.
Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and
NRCA Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer’s installation guidelines.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 4
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
F.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies
tested for fire resistance that comply with ASTME 108 in accordance with UL790.
G.
Mock Up: Prepare a full scale mock up for final review and approval by Architect / engineer. Mock ups
are intended to verify selection made under sample submittal and to demonstrate quality standards for
materials and execution. Mockups to be representative of the finished work product in all respects
including anchors, vapor barrier, insulation, roof deck, connections, gutters, downspout, fascia, ridge cap,
and fillers as accepted on the final Shop Drawings. Mock up to include openings and features common
to the building design such as roof openings and curbs. Coordinate mock up installation with Architect in
the field. Mock up to be a min area of 100 sf.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project location a minimum of ten (10) days prior to
start of work. Perform a pre-installation meeting / conference and coordinate installation with other
structural steel elements such as steel joists, and metal decking. Refer to Division 01, Project
Management and Coordination specification.
1.
Attendees: Building owner, owner’s representative, architect, installing contractor, general
contractor and sheet metal roofing manufacturer.
2.
All details shall be reviewed including; underlayments, substrates, fastening patterns, scheduling,
trim and flashing components, accessories such as fasteners and sealants.
H.
I.
Construction Inspection: Manufacturer shall conduct on-site inspections and formal written report to
architect and owner at the following intervals:
1.
Pre-construction meeting,
2.
50 percent sheet metal roofing installation completion,
3.
Final inspection upon completion of roof system.
4.
Conform to manufacturer’s requirements to maintain the system warranty.
J.
Installer’s Certificate: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system specified.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications:
1.
The manufacturer shall have had a minimum of ten (10) years - experience in the successful
completion of projects employing similar materials, applications, and performance requirements.
K.
L.
Applicator Qualifications:
1.
The roof systems contractor shall have had a minimum of ten (10) years - experience in the
successful completion of projects employing similar materials, applications, and performance
requirements.
2.
Minimum of (5) five satisfactory projects on similar types of roofs.
3.
Submit the Applicators Qualifications for approval.
M.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
Comply with requirements of applicable building codes and other agencies having jurisdiction for
wind uplift rating of standing seam roofs.
N.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system.
Authority’s Maintenance Department (AMD) Quality Control
1.
Contractor shall notify the Engineer and AMD Liaison 30 days prior to commencing work.
2.
Contractor shall provide the Engineer and AMD with a schedule of all roofing related activities
and product deliveries.
3.
Contractor shall be aware that an AMD representative will periodically inspect and evaluate the
work in progress and conduct various roofing specific field tests.
4.
Contractor shall be responsible to request and secure AMD pre-functional and functional
checklists as well as any other required documents.
O.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 5
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
5.
1.6
Electronic and hardcopy transmission of completed checklists and documents are required prior to
final inspection.
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.7
Do not deliver materials of this section to project site until suitable facilities for storage and protection are
available.
Protect materials from damage during transit and at project site. Store under cover, but sloped to provide
positive drainage. Do not expose materials with strippable protective film to direct sunlight or extreme
heat.
Do not allow storage of other materials or allow staging of other work on installed metal panel system.
Upon receipt of delivery of metal panel system, and prior to signing the delivery ticket, the installer is to
examine each shipment for damage and for completion of the consignment.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
1.8
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit assembly of metal roof panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions
and warranty requirements.
Field Measurements: Verify locations of roof framing and roof opening dimensions by field
measurements before metal roof panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
EQUIPMENT
A.
1.9
Manufacturer must maintain quality control and maintenance procedures of all production equipment.
Verification of quality control procedures must be validated by a 3rd party entity. Submit verification test
reports.
SCHEDULING
A.
B.
1.10
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations, which are specified in
Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
Coordinate metal panel roof assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of
decks, purlins and rafters, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leak-proof, secure, and
non-corrosive installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or
replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.
Finish Warranty Period: Thirty (30) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Installer's Warranty: Specified form in which Roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace components of
custom-fabricated sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within five (5) years from
date of Substantial Completion.
Weather-tight System Warranty: Manufacturer's warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weather tight within the specified warranty period.
Warranty includes material and labor with no dollar limit on the amount of coverage and no exclusions
related to system performance, defects, and installation of product are permitted within the warranty.
1.
Product Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 6
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Manufacturer's Qualifications: All panels are to be factory formed in full lengths and packaged to suit the
project requirements.
Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of experience in the factory fabrication of metal
roofing panels and accessories.
As a basis of design this specification is based upon the products of Merchant & Evans, Inc. - Panel
profile ZIP-RIB or approved equal by one of the following manufacturers.
1.
Other manufacturer’s include, but are not limited to the following upon submission and approval:
a.
CENTRIA: www.centria.com
b.
IMETCO: www.Imetco.com
c.
Or approved equal.
CONCEALED-FASTENER, STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
A.
B.
C.
General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching
panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and
accessories required for weathertight installation to satisfy and comply with manufacturer’s warranty.
Structural Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with structural ribs at panel edges and
intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by
mechanically seaming panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and
lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels.
Basis-of-Design Product:
1.
For Low sloped standing seam applications at New MUB (RS-#) and Fire Pump House (RS#):
a.
Provide roof panels by Merchant & Evans, Inc. - 16” ZIP-RIB or an approved equal.
2.
Manufacturer:
a.
Merchant & Evans, Inc., or approved equal.
b.
Panel Material: Aluminum .040”
c.
Panel Texture: Smooth
d.
Pan Coverage: 16"
e.
Seam Height: 2-1/2"
f.
Joint Type: Bulb Type shall be mechanically Seamed with injected factory sealant.
g.
Finish: VALSPAR FLUROPON (KYNAR 5000® PVDF or HYLAR 5000® min 70%
PVDF) two coat fluoropolymer coil coated system consisting of a 0.20 mil primer, 0.80 mil
topcoat for a total dry film thickness (TDFT) of 1.0 mil nominal protection.
1)
Roof Panels: Color shall match VALSPAR FLUROPON REGAL WHITE SR
431A844 as indicated on finish schedule, if a schedule does not exist, selection will
be made by Architect from a full range of standard two coat 1.0 mil TDFT colors.
2)
Gutters / Downspouts / Flashings: Color shall match VALSPAR FLUROPON
CLASSIC II SR CHAMPAGNE 439RZ5856M as indicated on finish schedule, if a
schedule does not exist, selection will be made by Architect from a full range of
standard and premium colors including two coat, 1.0 mil micas (Fluropon Classic
II) colors. Color will vary from roof panel selection.
3)
If contractor proposes an alternative system manufacturer than the finish selection
scheduled will be color matched.
h.
Comply with SR value requirements for sloped roofs, min SR value of 0. 25 or greater; or
approved equal.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 7
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
i.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
2.3
Provide primed coating on unexposed side of panel.
Provide sloped roof system for the MUB and Fire Pump House roof. Fasten roof system to
structural support system (decking) with a minimum of 300 series stainless steel fasteners
suggested by roof manufacturer.
Provide raised / elevated clips to promote air ventilation with an air gap of 3/8” minimum air
space minimum between the supporting roof substrate and roofing metal panel.
All plates, clips and fasteners are to be a minimum of 300 series stainless steel.
Clips: Floating Two Piece to accommodate thermal movement.
Material: 300 Series Stainless steel; No carbon steel components will be accepted.
Panel Sealants:
1.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2.
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.
Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
VAPOR BARRIER AND UNDERLAYMENT PRODUCTS
A.
Underlayment Board & Cover Board: Gypsum Board: 5/8" moisture-, mold- and impact-resistant,
nonstructural fiber-reinforced gypsum panel made from 95 percent recycled materials similar to Securock
by US Gypsum Corporation; or “Dens-Deck® Prime®” by G-P Gypsum Corp., Atlanta, Georgia; or
approved equal.
1.
Flame Spread (ASTM E84): 0
2.
Smoke Developed (ASTM E84): 0
3.
None Combustible when Tested in accordance with ASTM E136
4.
UL Classified Type X when tested in accordance with ASTM E119
5.
Install underlayment board on metal roof deck below insulation system.
6.
Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation.
7.
Apply at locations noted on Drawings or as required by the manufacturer for warranty compliance.
8.
Stagger all joints. Butt joints as required and provide adequate space for movement
9.
Cover and protect underlayment board after installation.
B.
Vapor Barrier installed under insulation system over underlayment board over metal deck: (RS#100
MUB and Fire Pump House Roofs): Provide a Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet, 45 mil Titanium
PSU-30 Synthetic Roofing Underlayment designed specifically for use under sheet metal roofing by the
metal roofing manufacturer, or approved equal.
1.
Thermal Stability: Resistant to 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passes
after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. With Asphalt free felt: Conforming to ASTM D
226, polyolefin based, 100 percent asphalt free, high strength reinforced roofing underlayment.
2.
Provide vapor barrier suitable for application as recommended by the roof manufacturer, or
approved equal.
C.
Secondary Underlayment: Manufacturer's recommended underlayment sheet, of type required for
application. Underlayment Sheet installed over cover board and insulation system under metal roof panel:
Provide a highly engineered, mechanically attached, coated woven synthetic roofing underlayment for
sloped roofs supplied by the metal roofing manufacturer. Product is 100% asphalt free, reinforced
underlayment. Advanced polymers are combined to produce a film that is unaffected by water and
resistant to UV for up to 6 months. Sheets / rolls are 48” wide by 250’ long, material is packaged in a roll
of approx. 1000 sq. ft., nominal thickness of 30 mils.
1.
Basis of design, similar to: Titanium UDL 50 or equal as supplied and warranted by the standing
seam metal roof manufacturer, or approved equal.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 8
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
D.
2.4
For thermal insulation refer to Division 07 Thermal Insulation. Rigid insulation board to be approved by
the metal roof manufacturer in writing for use with their system.
MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A.
B.
C.
2.5
Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance
unless otherwise indicated.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:
1.
Nominal Thickness: As required to meet structural and wind load performance requirements.
2.
Depth: As indicated or required for profiles noted on drawings.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flange.
1.
Nominal Thickness: As required to meet structural and wind load performance requirements.
2.
Depth: As indicated or required for profiles noted on drawings.
3.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with nominal thickness of 0.040
inch (1.02 mm).
4.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.22-mm-) diameter wire.
CUSTOM FABRICATED ITEMS
A.
B.
All Custom Fabricated items are to be provided by the metal roofing manufacturer and included in the
system warranty. Custom fabricated items are to be factory fabricated unless otherwise noted.
Custom fabricate metal flashings, trim, expansion joints, and similar items to comply with profiles and
sizes shown on drawings.
1.
Comply with standard industry details as shown by SMACNA in the "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual". Comply with metal producer’s recommendations for tinning, soldering, and cleaning
flux from metal.
2.
Fabricate flashing and sheet metal items from aluminum sheet.
(1) Gutters: 0.040-inch aluminum, sizes indicated on drawings, with outlet tubes, gutter ends,
expansion joints, baffles as indicated of same material.
(a) Hanger Brackets: To match gutter, minimum 0.125-inch x 1.5-inch aluminum, spaced
max. 2 ft. o.c.
(b) Spacers: To match gutter; minimum 0.125 inch x 1.5-inch spaced alternately with
hanger brackets.
(2) Downspouts: Square, .0.040-inch aluminum, sizes as indicated on drawings, with heavy
gauge wire strainers, elbows, hangers and transition boot to storm sewer system.
(a) If sizes are not shown on drawings, provide minimum 4”x6” downspout size, coordinate size with cast boot size.
(b) Connect into cast boot and storm drainage line below grade.
(3) Gutter Guards:
(a) Provide Gutter Guards at all gutters:
(b) On all gutters provide removable continuous gutter guards / screens with non-corrosive
fasteners. Gutter guard to be suitable for use and comply with wind speed zone requirements of project location.
(c) Submit shop drawing of gutter guard assembly and seam spacing layout.
(d) Finish: See Schedule, if not scheduled on drawings, as selected by Architect from same
finish selections available for roof system. Color selection may vary from color selection of roof.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 9
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
(4) Ridge Cap, Fascia, and Trim profiles: Formed aluminum in size and configuration noted on
drawings. Provide 12 ft. max. length with matching concealed joint splice plates allowing
for expansion and contraction, .040” aluminum to match roof system.
(a) Provide internal head splice in accordance with SMACNA standards, field fabricated.
(b) Corner Units: Provide miters for inside and outside corners.
(c) Provide continuous anchor cleats, 0.040” min, corrosion resistant.
(d) Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel or approved equal. No exposed fasteners.
(e) Color match to roofing system color. Back paint all metal.
(f) Venting: Provide vented profiles where noted on drawings with perforated holes. Provide Pre-perforated vented “Z” trim where required to promote venting. Provide continuous insect screen, concealed to view fixed on back side of vented perforations. Apply 18x16 - standard mesh fiberglass screen or approved equal.
(5) Drip Edge – Formed aluminum in size and configuration noted on drawings. Provide 12 ft.
max. length with matching concealed joint splice plates allowing for expansion and
contraction, .040” aluminum to match roof system or approved equal.
(a) Provide internal head splice in accordance with SMACNA standards, field fabricated.
(b) Corner Units: Provide miters for inside and outside corners.
(c) Provide continuous anchor cleats, 0.040” min, corrosion resistant.
(d) Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel or approved equal. No exposed fasteners.
(e) Color match to fascia color. Back paint all metal.
C.
Flashings / Gutters / Downspouts Finishes: All Aluminum Products to be finished as specified in Part 2.2
above. Color selection of trim, accessories, gutters, downspouts and flashings to be a different color from
roof panels as selected by Architect from full line of standard and premium color selections including two
coat, 1.0 mil micas (Fluropon Classic II) colors.
1.
Finish selections: Refer to finish noted in Part 2.2 of the specification or as noted on the finish
schedule on the documents. If a finish schedule is not provided, finishes will be selected by
Architect from the full line of standard and premium colors.
2.
If color is scheduled and contractor submits an alternative product they will color match the color
selection.
D.
Form all accessories in sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion. Form in
largest practical lengths. Form seams as recommended by metal producer for applications shown on
Drawings. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inches long legs; seam and seal. Fabricate
vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward and hemmed to form drip.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL
A.
Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to
withstand design loads. Manufacturer shall provide or authorize all fasteners utilized with the sheet metal
roofing system.
1.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
a.
Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or screws spaced to resist wind uplift
loads.
2.
3.
4.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solid polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with
release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, non-toxic, non-staining tape.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to produce joints in sheet metal roofing that will remain weather tight.
Expansion-Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints, which must be free to move, provide
non-setting, non-hardening, non-migrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene sealant.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 10
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
5.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 mil dry
film thickness per coat.
Refer to Sheet Metal Trim and Flashing specification section for additional related materials and
accessories.
6.
2.7
ACCESSORIES
A.
Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a
complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips,
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal
roof panels unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.
2.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked, polyolefin-foam or closedcell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to
ensure weather-tight construction.
3.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, pre-painted with coil coating, minimum
as specified. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings,
ridges, fascia, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
C.
Metal Soffit Panels: (Contractor’s Option at MUB)
1. Flush-Lock Series 311-.75 1B (1 Bead); 12” wide panel with (2) 6” sections. Panels by Merchant & Evans, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey.
a. Other manufacturers include but are not limited to:
(1) CENTRIA: www.centria.com
(2) IMETCO: www.Imetco.com
(3) Or approved equal
b.
c.
d.
Manufacturer shall have had at least ten years' experience in Architectural Metal Manufacturing.
Manufacturer shall demonstrate past experience with examples of projects of similar type and exposure.
The installer shall be competent, experienced, and familiar with the principles of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. The installer shall have capacity for preparation of shop details and
fabrication of all flashings not furnished by the panel manufacturer.
Products submittal to include technical data on all characteristics of the proposed item.
2. Reference Standards:
a. Aluminum Association - AA
(1) Specifications for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction
(2) Specifications for Aluminum Structures.
(3) Standards and Data.
b.
American Iron & Steel Institute -AISI
(1) Cold Formed Steel Design Manual.
c.
ASTM
(1) A446-Physical Qualities of Steel.
(2) A525-Zinc Coated Steel.
(3) B209-Aluminum & Plate.
(4) A792-General Requirements for Aluminum-Zinc Coated Sheet
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 11
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3. Performance Requirements
(1) The installation shall be designed to safely resist the positive and negative loads required by the
2009 IBC NJ Edition, loads noted on the structural drawings, and criteria required by the site
location. Provide engineered calculations prepared by a licensed engineer in the state where the
project is located.
(2) Panel and flashing attachments shall be designed to accommodate the thermal expansion and
contraction of the exterior material through a 140 degree F temperature change.
(3) Panels shall carry the uniform design loads required by code with a maximum total panel deflection of L/140 as measured in the flat of the panel.
(4) Factors of safety on design loads to ultimate strength of fasteners shall be as stated in the industry standard for the material into which the fastener is driven.
4. Materials - Panels And Sheet
a. Panels shall be fabricated in full lengths from wall face to fascia without end laps only as shown on
the drawings. Panels shall be (12”) wide with concealed anchors that resist wind uplift yet permit
expansion and contraction with temperature changes. Panels shall be (smooth) prefinished 3004
3003 or 3105 aluminum per ASTM B 209, minimum thickness of material to be (.040").
b. Flashing shall be the same material type and finish as the soffit panel, but the temper may be reduced
to facilitate forming. Minimum thickness shall be the same as the soffit panel.
c. Finish shall be Kynar Fluorocarbon coating (match roof warranty).
(1) VALSPAR FLUROPON (KYNAR 500® PVDF or HYLAR 5000® min 70% PVDF) two coat
fluoropolymer coil coated system consisting of a 0.20 mil primer, 0.80 mil topcoat for a total
dry film thickness (TDFT) of 1.0 mil nominal protection.
(2) Soffit Panels: VALSPAR FLUROPON CLASSIC II SR CHAMPAGNE 439RZ5856M or
approved equal. Color as indicated on finish schedule, if a schedule does not exist, selection
will be made by Architect from a full range of standard two coat 1.0 mil TDFT colors thru a
sample review.
5. Product Performance-Finish Shall Conform to the Following:
(1) Salt Spray Resistance:
(a) Method: 5% Salt Fog per ASTM B-117-64 (Reapproved 1973). Duration: 2,000 per hours
for aluminum.
(b) Results: Aluminum: Creepage on scribe to bare metal not more than 1/32"; field blisters,
none.
(2)
Humidity Resistance:
(a) Method: 100% Relative Humidity per ASTM D-2247-68. Duration: 1,000 hours & 1,500
hours.
(b) Results: No field blisters. No change in pencil hardness after 24 hours. No creep from
scribe.
(3)
Accelerated Weathering:
(a) Method #1 Weatherometer operated per ASTMD-822-60. Duration: 5,000 hours.
(b) Chalk: Chalk shall have a rating of 8 to 10 (no chalk) per ASTM D-659-44 (Reapproved
1974).
(c) Color Change: No greater than 5 NBS units after removal of external deposits, as determined by ASTM D-2244-68.
(d) Gloss Retention: Shall retain a minimum of 70% of original gloss after removal of external deposits when measured at 60 as determined by ASTM D-523-67.
(4)
Formability:
(a) Method: Scored T-Bend using impact wedge bend apparatus per ASTM D-3281-73.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 12
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
(b)
(5)
Results: No cracking and no pick off with Scotch 610 tape at 1-T Bend prior to fracture of
base metal.
Direct and Reverse Impact Resistance:
(a) Method: Impact Resistance per ASTM D-2794-69 (NCCA No. 11-6 procedure).
(b) Results: No pick-off with Scotch 610 tape at 1-1/2 times metal gauge, using a Gardner
Variable Impact Tester. 5/8" diameter ball, prior to fracture of base metal.
6. Soffit Material - Accessory Items
(1) Provide anchor clips, continuous trim profiles for soffits and fascia terminations, and flush panel joints with splice trim required to make the assembly complete.
(2) Anchor clips shall be aluminum coated with nylon or galvanized steel to minimize wear from
thermal movement. Fasteners in supports and screws installed in clips shall be fully recessed
so that no sharp edges come in contact with the soffit material. Where required, clips shall be
designed to allow for expansion and contraction of the system relative to the structure throughout the temperature range specified.
(3) Screws holding anchor clips to the structure shall be:
(a) Into metal framing and concrete: stainless steel.
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Exposed fasteners are discouraged, if required, they shall be stainless steel. For weathertightness, screws shall have separate washers with hot bonded neoprene faces, and pop rivets shall
be set in wet sealant. Exposed fasteners shall be a minimum No. 14 size screw or 3/16 inch diameter rivet.
Precut foam profile closures, if applicable, shall be black closed cell foam meeting specified
ASTM D 1056 grade SPE-41 Black EPT.
Sealant used with the soffit shall be applied between surfaces during assembly with a minimum
amount exposed on the completed installation.
(a) Concealed sealant may be non-curing, non-skinning butyl, polisobutylene or polybutane
tape of sufficient thickness to make full contact with both surfaces.
(b) Exposed sealant shall be curing type with excellent weather and sunlight resistance. Color shall be as selected by the Architect. Apply in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
Provide vapor barrier under all horizontal panels. Install according to the manufacturer's recommendations and provide a continuous, unbroken vapor barrier under panels and around penetrations, etc. Vapor barrier is critical to the performance of architectural sheet metal and provides the necessary secondary weatherproofing. Provide a vapor barrier similar to a selfadhering, high-temperature sheet, 45 mil Titanium PSU-30 Synthetic Roofing Underlayment
designed specifically for use under sheet metal systems by the metal roofing / soffit manufacturer, or approved equal.
7. Fabrication:
(1) Minimum inside bend radius on flashing shall be 3T, and all edges shall have an open hem for
stiffness.
(2) Insofar as possible, attachment screws shall be eliminated in favor of concealed cleats or clips.
8. Execution:
(1) Installation
(a) Storage and Handling. Protection shall be provided during fabrication, shipment, storage,
and erection. During shipment, finished surfaces shall be protected from abrasion by a
removable plastic film between area of contact.
(b) Job site storage shall be in a clean, dry area out of direct contact with the ground, under
cover, or sloped for drainage, protected from abuse by traffic and from contamination by
corrosive or staining materials.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 13
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(2)
(3)
(4)
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.8
Stored materials and unfinished work shall be secured against wind damage.
Installed panels shall be protected from abuse by other trades.
Provide walk boards in areas of heavy traffic and any other measures required to prevent
damage of material.
Notify the General Contractor of any necessity for protection from other trades.
Before installation, this contractor shall verify that the structure is ready to receive his work.
He shall check field dimensions and alignment of structural members to assure that the soffit
panels and flashing will be straight and true. The contractor shall be notify the General contractor of unresolved conditions which may adversely affect the performance or appearance of
the installed system, and work on that location will not proceed until approved by the contractor.
All work shall be installed in accordance with approved shop details under direct supervision of
an experienced sheet metal craftsman. Attachments and joints shall allow for expansion and
contraction from temperature changes without distortion or elongation of fastener holes. Flashing shall be installed in strict accordance with the recommended practice in the AA, NRCA,
and SMACNA architectural sheet metal manuals: without fasteners in end laps, and isolated
from dissimilar materials.
Completed work shall be plumb and true, free of scrapes and dents. Panel ribs shall be the
module indicated in the contract drawings within the tolerance allowed by the actual construction dimensions. Excess sealant shall be removed and touch-up paint applied to any areas
where paint scrapes occur. Any panels which are badly damaged and in the judgement of the
Architect cannot be repaired shall be removed and replaced.
Snow Guards: Prefabricated, non-corrosive units designed for compatibility with metal roof panels. See
Division 07 for more information. Compression clamping system similar to S-5-Z clamping system with
Color Guard Snow Retention System, or approved equal.
Lightning Protection: Provide mounting brackets and support components compatible with metal roofing
system. Compression clamping system similar to S-5 clamping system or approved equal.
Gutter and Valley Protection Membrane: as recommended by manufacturer.
Gutter Guards: Provide perforated guards to prevent debris build up.
Ice and Waterguard Sheet: as recommended by manufacturer.
Ridge and Hip ventilation fillers: as recommended by manufacturer and where shown on drawings.
1.
Cut to fit, placed under metal caps along hip and ridge, top of wall conditions.
FABRICATION METAL ROOFING
A.
General: Fabricate sheet metal roofing and components to comply with details shown, manufacturers
installation details and recommendations in the following:
1.
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and NRCA Waterproofing Manual that apply to
the design, dimensions (pan width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other
characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofing and accessories at the
manufacturer’s location to the greatest extent possible.
B.
General: Fabricate sheet metal roofing panels to comply with details shown and sheet metal roofing
manufacturer's detail requirements and written instructions.
Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work sufficient to prevent leakage,
damage, and deterioration of the Work.
Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks,
true to line and levels indicated, and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1.
Fold and cleat eaves as required by manufacturer to insure weather tightness and wind uplift
resistance.
C.
D.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 14
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.9
Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings,
and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown and
as required for leak proof construction and wind uplift resistance.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each
contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals
or by fabricator.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other
characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before manufacturer
fabrication.
Fabrication of Panels:
1.
Panels to be Factory fabricated in a controlled environment.
2.
Panels to be tension leveled during roll forming process.
3.
Panels shall be manufactured by a rolled process that utilizes a minimum of 18 die passes for the
gradual forming of the profile shape to reduce the stresses placed on the material during the
fabrication process.
4.
Panels to be produced in longest lengths possible, except when modular units are utilized.
Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, for full length of panel.
Retain first paragraph below if gaskets or sealants are factory installed.
Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide
a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise
from movements within panel assembly.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
ROOF DRAINAGE CUSTOM METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other
accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long sections unless otherwise noted. Furnish
flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended
by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint
covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
Downspouts: Factory fabricated rectangular profile downspouts as shown on drawings, complete with
mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.
1.
Manufactured Hanger Style: Provide a concealed hanger system.
2.
Fabricate downspouts from the following material:
a.
Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick minimum.
b.
Sizes as indicated on drawings, with heavy gauge wire strainers, elbows, and hangers.
c.
Fabricated downspouts in straight run sections as shown on drawings. Utilize stand-off
brackets of same material and finish as the downspout to hold downspout clear of
projecting obstructions such as precast sills and other fabricated items. Adjust length as
required for installation to be plumb, level, and continuous. Indicate profiles on shop
drawings.
Provide transition boots to match the storm system profiles.
1.
Connection to storm sewer to be made with a no-hub coupling or other approved method from
manufacturer to achieve a clean un-obstructed connection below grade. Connection to be
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 15
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2.
compatible with storm boot connection and storm system piping outlet. Cast aluminum products
are to be used unless otherwise accepted by Architect.
Discharge downspouts to boot fitting from one of the following manufacturers, or an approved
equal:
a.
Barry Pattern & Foundry Company Inc. or approved equal. Product Model “B25A” rectangular pattern, custom length as required, minimum size 4’-0” above grade and a min
depth of 1’-6” below grade. Coordinate with footing depth and storm lines.
1)
Provide removable clean out panel with gasket above grade in face of boot.
2)
Provide a minimum of (2) standoff brackets made of material compatible with boot
material to connect to wall.
3)
Provide transition fitting and elbow fitting below grade to receive round storm line
with no-hub coupling connection. Storm line to be a minimum 6” diameter pipe;
confirm with storm water pipe size on design drawings and submittal. Provide transition fittings as required.
4)
Boot Length: Coordinate length with project drawings and discharge below grade.
Provide a minimum of 12” of coverage below grade for downspout shoe. Coordinate invert elevations with Site / Civil Drawings.
5)
Finish with high performance paint. Color and finish selected by Architect from
full range.
b.
Piedmont Downspout Adapters or approved equal, 7907 Commerce Dr., Denver, NC
28037. Phone: 877 489 0911 or 704 489 0911; www.piedmontpipe.com.
1)
Product Model “Piedmont Pipe Downspout Boot Model MO” rectangular pattern
boot in a minimum of 12 gauge stainless steel, custom fabricated including length as
required, minimum size 4’-0” above grade and a min depth of 1’-6” below grade.
Coordinate with footing depth and storm lines.
2)
Provide removable clean out panel with gasket above grade in face of boot.
3)
Provide a minimum of (2) standoff brackets made of stainless steel to connect to
wall.
4)
Coordinate inlet depth, inlet width, body length, outlet size, and offset dimension to
meet project requirements. Submit details and dimensions in submittal for Architect’s review.
5)
Provide transition fitting and elbow fitting below grade to receive round storm line
with no-hub coupling connection. Storm line to be a minimum 6” diameter pipe;
confirm with storm water pipe size on design drawings and submittal. Provide transition fittings as required.
6)
Boot Length: Coordinate length with project drawings and discharge below grade.
Provide a minimum of 12” of coverage below grade for downspout shoe. Coordinate invert elevations with Site / Civil Drawings.
7)
Finish with high performance paint. Color and finish selected by Architect from
full range.
c.
Standoff bracket / panel @ Downspout Boot:
1)
Frame legs – provide frame legs using an aluminum angle, min size 1”x1”x ¼”.
2)
Top and bottom frame – provide aluminum “U” channel, face dimension to match
aluminum angle, min 1” legs x ¼” thickness. “U” channel to receive insert panel.
Weld in place. Provide weep holes in bottom of “U” channel to drain water from
inside channel.
3)
Insert panel – provide aluminum panel insert similar to McNichols Quality 1"
Square Opening Wire Mesh 0.1200" Wire, Square Weave, #3792220041,
Aluminum, 48.00" x 120.00" or approved equal. Sandwich panel and weld to
aluminum frame.
4)
Provide a minimum of (2) brackets to mount panel to wall and downspout boot.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 16
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
5)
6)
D.
Refer to drawings for dimensions of panel. Approximate dimensions 12” from top
and bottom of down spout boot x approximately 8” wide.
Panel assembly to be finished with high performance paint. Color and finish
selected by Architect from full range.
E.
Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years in
accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories, profiles to suit gutters and downspouts with
matching finish, including scupper head, roof aprons, leaf strainers, and downspout elbows.
1.
Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
F.
Seal metal joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
3.2
Verification of Conditions (by Installer/Applicator): Examine conditions under which metal roofing
system products are to be installed in coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in
this Section and notify the General Contractor in writing, with copies to the Owner’s Representative and
Architect, of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
When Installer confirms conditions are acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation of the
proposed products and confirms requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied;
submit to General Contractor written confirmation, with copies to the Owner’s Representative and
Architect, from applicable Installer. Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation
will be assumed to indicate conditions are acceptable to Installer.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and
other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment
tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
2.
Examine solid roof substrate system to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel
manufacturer.
3.
For the record, prepare written report for the General Contractor, endorsed by Installer, listing
conditions detrimental to performance of work. Submit verification corrective action has been
taken and was completed prior to work being installed.
4.
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel
installation.
5.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub-purlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel
support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions.
Lay-out and examine substrate before installation of sheet metal roofing. Space fasteners as required to
resist design uplift, but not more than 24 inches o.c.
Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 17
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3.3
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Vapor Barrier/Ice and Water Shield:
1.
As a basis of design and supplied and warranted by the metal roofing manufacturer, the following
products have been specified for Self-Adhering Sheet Vapor Barrier/Ice and Water Shield
Underlayment; Titanium PSU-30 Synthetic Roofing Underlayment, 45 mil thick, or approved
equal.
a.
Install self-adhering sheet vapor barrier, wrinkle free, on roof deck.
b.
Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation.
c.
Apply at locations noted on Drawings or as required by the manufacturer for warranty
compliance in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches
staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3.5 inches. Extend
underlayment a minimum of 1.5 inches up to fascia board. Roll laps with roller. Cover
underlayment within 14 days.
B.
C.
Apply Secondary Underlayment sheet over insulation and cover board before installing metal roof panels.
Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.4
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as recommended
by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.
1.
Install metal roofing system in accordance with approved erection drawings and manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
2.
Install metal roofing system so that it is weather tight without waves, warps, buckles, fastening
stress or distortions.
3.
Install panels in one continuous length.
4.
All attachments shall allow for thermal expansion and contraction of roof panels.
5.
Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted.
6.
Rigidly fasten ridge end of sheet metal roofing and allow for positive panel attachment as per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
7.
All flashing details shall accommodate thermal movement.
8.
Provide metal closures at peaks, ridge, gable and hip caps.
9.
Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all
openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
10.
Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing splices and
end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
11.
Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the material.
12.
Install snow guards as shown on drawings. Snow guards shall not be installed in any manner that
penetrates the roof panels.
13.
Vapor retarders used over decking shall be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions. Any
breaks or tears shall be repaired prior to panel installation.
14.
Metal filings caused by cutting and drilling shall be immediately removed from finished surfaces
to prevent damage to installed products.
15.
The roof panel systems contractor shall coordinate work with other trades as required to insure
proper flashing and seals with adjoining construction.
16.
Protect installed panels from abuse by other trades. The general contractor shall be responsible for
protecting the roofing from wet cement, plaster, and painting operations. The installer shall
provide walk boards in heavy traffic areas to prevent damage to the panels.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 18
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
B.
C.
D.
3.5
Fasteners: Use fasteners of size and length as required for compatibility with substrate. Provide fasteners
required to comply with wind load design criteria as specified in system performance.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of
sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1.
Separate sheet metal roofing from bituminous coating where roofing will contact wood, ferrous
metal, or cementitious construction.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize
possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each
standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
1.
Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners.
2.
Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
3.
Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip,
metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide
for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1.
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings,
ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
2.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and
seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.
Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level.
4.
Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B.
Coordinate with installation of:
1.
Structure and metal deck as noted in Division 05.
2.
Rough Carpentry, as noted in Division 06.
3.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim, as noted in Division 07.
4.
Mechanical and Plumbing Divisions for wall and roof penetrations.
C.
Pipe and duct or curb flashing: Form flashing around penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal
to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
Refer to DIVISION 01 - for general requirements for field quality control and inspection.
Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturer’s technical representative a
minimum of three (3) visits during installation of the Work.
Testing agency: Upon completion of the installation, the roofing system installer shall arrange for an
inspection to be made by independent (non-sales) technical representative of the roofing system
manufacturer in order to determine whether or not corrective work will be required before the warranty
will be issued. Notify the Architect and the building Owner seventy-two (72 hours prior to the
manufacturer’s inspection.) Provide copy of report from testing agent to Architect and Owner.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 19
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
D.
3.8
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer’s technical personnel to inspect roofing
installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as sheet metal roofing is installed.
On completion of sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused
fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing.
1.
Clean metal roofing at completion of all work.
2.
Remove all markings from finished surfaces.
3.
In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of
surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
4.
Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.
D.
E.
F.
Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.
Where traffic must continue over finished roof, protect surfaces using durable materials.
Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner and comply with local
jurisdiction regulations/requirements.
Protect roofing system from damage and scratches.
Repair or remove and replace components from roofing system where test results, punch list, or
inspections indicate work does not comply with specified requirements.
Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper and other debris from the site.
Comply with waste management and recycling program requirements.
Dispose of all waste legally and in compliance with local jurisdiction requirements.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
END OF SECTION
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - Page 20
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes but is not limited to commercial door hardware for the following:
1.
Swinging doors. (interior and exterior)
2.
Hollow Metal Doors.
3.
FRP and Aluminum Doors.
4.
Other doors to the extent indicated.
B.
Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
Mechanical door hardware.
2.
Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
3.
Coordination and integration with electrical, security systems, fire alarm, and video surveillance
systems.
C.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 03 - Precast Structural Concrete Wall Panels
2.
Division 04 – Unit Masonry Assemblies.
3.
Division 06 – Rough Carpentry.
4.
Division 08 – Door Hardware Schedule
5.
Division 08 – Access Control Hardware
6.
Division 08 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
7.
Division 08 – Aluminum-Framed Storefront
8.
Division 08 – Aluminum Doors and Frames
9.
Division 08 – FRP Doors and Frames
10.
Division 08 – Glazing.
11.
Division 09 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.
12.
Division 09 – Painting and Coating.
13.
Division 26 – Electrical Sections.
14.
Division 28 – Electrical Sections (Access Control / Fire Detection / Video Surveillance)
D.
Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.
ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2.
ANSI/SDI A250.13 - Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swing Door
Assemblies.
3.
ASTM E1886 - Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtin Walls, Doors and Shutters
Impacted by Missiles and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.
4.
ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure difference.
5.
ASTM E1996 - Standard specification for performance of exterior windows, curtain walls, doors and
storm shutters impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes.
6.
ICC/IBC - International Building Code NJ 2009.
7.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
8.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 1
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
E.
1.3
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
TAS-201-94 - Impact Test Procedures.
TAS-202-94 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope Components
using Uniform Static Air Pressure.
TAS-203-94 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading.
State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1.
ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series
2.
UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Procedure: Comply with submittal requirements indicated below and as stipulated in 013300 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications, application instructions,
product storage and handling requirements, and similar data for each product specified below as required to
demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and provide complete application information.
1.
Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and
assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware
Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of
door hardware.
1.
Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the
Hardware Schedule."
2.
Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete
designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same
order as in the Door Hardware Sets specified in Division 08. Submittals that do not follow the same
format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3.
Provide coordinated shop drawings between the door hardware systems, access control, fire alarm,
specialty door products, system programming, wiring diagrams, electrical systems and controls.
4.
Content: Include the following information:
a.
Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
b.
Manufacturer of each item.
c.
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d.
Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door
and frame schedule.
e.
Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f.
Mounting locations for door hardware.
g.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
h.
Wiring diagrams for electronic components.
i.
Provide coordinated shop drawings between the products and vendors for system
components and installation requirements including rough in, wiring, programming,
installation, and integration.
5.
Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly
where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical
in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work
affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door
Hardware Schedule.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 2
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
6.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.4
Integrate and coordinate door hardware submittals with submittals required in Access Control, Door
Hardware Schedule, and Automatic Operators specified in Division 08.
Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation document
indicating proof of status as a qualified and authorized provider of the specified products.
Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval must be submitted in writing and in accordance
with the procedures and time frames outlined in NJTA 10 and Division 01. Approval of requests is at the
discretion of the architect.
Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying
instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set
symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior
to the ordering of permanent cylinders.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each
item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout
Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing
the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the
installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.
Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section.
Sustainability / Environmental Submittals: Show evidence including but not limited to the following:
1.
Recycled content – documentation showing product supports pre and post - consumer content.
2.
Indoor Environmental Quality - product is VOC compliant in the state and jurisdiction the project is
located.
3.
Proposed products, where possible, are to be manufactured within a 500-mile radius of the project site
and are considered to be a locally produced material which supports regional materials and resources.
4.
Comply with recycling program and waste management procedures.
5.
Comply with optimizing energy performance.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with the applicable sections noted in DIVISION 1, including but
limited to the following:
1.
Requirements of 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES;
2.
Submission of maintenance instructions described in 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DATA;
3.
Record documents as described in 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS;
4.
Demonstration and training requirements indicated in 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 10 years of documented
experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a
proven record of successful in-service performance.
Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum 10 years
documented experience installing both standard and electrified builders hardware similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a
minimum 10 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware
installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized
as a factory direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a
warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner
concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.
1.
Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 3
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
D.
E.
F.
Security (Access Control) System Supplier Qualifications: Provide products and system controls required to
be supplied and installed through a certified access control provider approved by the Owner and Architect.
Supplier / Installer must have a minimum of 10 years of experience. Supplier / Installer are to be factory
trained, certified, and a direct purchaser of the specified access control systems and be responsible for the
installation and maintenance of the units and accessories indicated for the Project. Security System Supplier
will be the integrator of electronic door hardware systems with the security (access control system), fire
alarm, and video surveillance system. This is a responsibility of the contractor to provide as part of the bid.
See notes listed in Door Hardware Schedule 080671.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section from a single
source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a
secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2.
Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware,
unless otherwise indicated.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and
guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and accessories listed
and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
2.
Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as
follows:
3.
Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one
hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.
4.
Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated:
1)
Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
2)
Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
5.
Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2.
6.
NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:
1)
Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall
not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
2)
Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high.
7.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for
fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or
UL-10C.
1)
Test Pressure: Positive pressure labeling.
G.
H.
Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01. Keying conference to
incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:
1.
Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
2.
Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3.
Requirements for key control storage and software.
4.
Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5.
Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
I.
Coordinated shop drawings:
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 4
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
1.
2.
3.
J.
1.5
Provide coordinated shop drawings between the door hardware systems, access control, fire alarm,
specialty door products, system programming, wiring diagrams, electrical systems and controls.
Coordinated shop drawings between the products and vendors for system components and installation
requirements including rough in, wiring, programming, installation, and integration.
Provide proof and coordination of templating of hardware with specialty door products and systems
including detention / security grade products, bullet resistant products, overhead sectional doors, and
concealment of associated wiring systems in the walls for rough in prior to installation of work.
Pre-Construction Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division
01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), Architect,
Owner’s Representative, and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,
handling, and installing door hardware.
1.
Prior to installation of door hardware, arrange for manufacturers' representatives to hold a project
specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and
adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware
(including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will
include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples
as required.
2.
Integration of security access control, fire alarm, video surveillance coordination. Products being
supplied installed and programmed by security vendor and associated coordination with hardware
systems.
3.
Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work
performed by other trades and required for the system integration and coordination.
4.
Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
5.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
6.
Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
B.
C.
1.6
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to
Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without
prior authorization.
Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and
include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related
accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the
Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
COORDINATION
A.
B.
C.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work
specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of
other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with
indicated requirements.
Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified
door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction
boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.
Door and Frame Preparation: Related Division 08 Sections (Steel, Aluminum and Wood) doors and
corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of
the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field
modifications.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 5
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.8
General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article
shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components
of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2.
Faulty operation of the hardware.
3.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4.
Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
Standard Warranty Period: Two years minimum from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
Special Warranty Periods:
1.
Ten years for mortise locks and latches.
2.
Five years for exit hardware.
3.
Twenty five years for manual door closers.
4.
Two years for electromechanical door hardware.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
B.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions
as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified
warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and replacement of worn
or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation.
Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Refer to Division 08 – Door Hardware Sets specification for more information. Provide door
hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that
products are listed.
1.
Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other
distinctive qualities for each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets specified
in Division 08.
2.
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1)
Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing the basis of design for
the specified requirements.
2)
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
3)
The specification reference number is listed as to where the product is specified and is
supplied under the respective section / vendor responsible for that portion of the work.
All work specified is part of the GC contract.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 6
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3.
4.
2.2
HANGING DEVICES
A.
B.
2.3
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,
purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
Permanent cylinders, cores, and keys to be installed by Owner.
Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door
Hardware Sets.
1.
Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
1)
Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
2)
Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
3)
Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
4)
For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every
30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2.
Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door
thickness and clearances required:
1)
Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
2)
Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3.
Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1)
Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets
indicate standard weight.
2)
Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets
indicate heavy weight.
4.
Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings:
1)
Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a
groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following
applications:
a)
Out-swinging exterior doors.
b)
Out-swinging access controlled doors.
5.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Bommer Industries (BO).
2)
Hager Companies (HA).
3)
McKinney Products (MK).
4)
Or approved equal.
Pin and Barrel Continuous Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 certified pin and barrel continuous hinges with
minimum 12 gauge (.105) Type 304 stainless steel hinge leaves, concealed teflon-coated stainless pin, and
twin self-lubricated nylon bearings at each knuckle separation. Fabricate hinges non-handed and U.L. listed
for use on up to and including 3 hour rated doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where
applicable. Provide hinges with power transfer cutouts where indicated at electrified openings.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Markar Products (MA).
2)
McKinney Products (MK).
3)
Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
4)
Or approved equal.
POWER TRANSFER DEVICES
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 7
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
A.
Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized
plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions
specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for
connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option.
2)
McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option.
3)
Or approved equal.
B.
Provide mortar guard enclosure on steel frames installed at masonry openings for each electrical hinge
specified.
2.4
DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A.
Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified automatic, selflatching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of
sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for
bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed
for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes,
coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Door Controls International (DC).
2)
Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
3)
Trimco (TC).
4)
Or approved equal.
B.
Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified
below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting
hardware dictates.
1.
Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, 4-inches wide by 16-inches high, with square corners and
beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Straight Pull Design: Minimum 1-inch round diameter stainless steel bar or tube stock pulls with 2
1/2-inch projection from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Offset Pull Design: Minimum 1-inch round diameter stainless steel bar or tube stock pulls with 2 1/2inch projection and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Push Bars: Minimum 1-inch round diameter horizontal push bars with minimum clearance of 2 1/2inch projection from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.
6.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
2)
Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
3)
Trimco (TC).
4)
Or approved equal.
2.5
CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
B.
C.
General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years of experience designing secured master key
systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as
locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1.
Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.
2.
Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 8
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3.
4.
D.
Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified patented cylinders employing a utility patented
and restricted keyway requiring the use of a patented key. Cylinders are to be protected from unauthorized
manufacture and distribution by manufacturer’s United States patents. Cylinders are to be factory keyed with
owner having the ability for on-site original key cutting.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Medeco (MC) - Keymark X4 Series.
2)
Or approved equal
E.
Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed to owners existing Medeco X4 system.
Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and
requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control
number as directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: Provide
Factory Bitting List
Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying Conference"
to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large
bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions
made in keying conference, and as follows:
1.
Existing Medeco System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system Medeco
X4 System.
F.
G.
Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1.
Top Master Key: One (1)
2.
Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)
3.
Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2)
4.
Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2)
5.
Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2)
6.
Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2)
H.
Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed construction cores
where specified. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. Replace
construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified
"Keying Conference".
Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for
importing into key control software.
Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking
key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard
metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the
project. Locate key cabinet in secure location inside building designated by Owner or Architect.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Lund Equipment (LU).
2)
Telkee (TK).
3)
Or approved equal.
I.
J.
K.
2.6
Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be
free spinning with matching finishes.
Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software
package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory
key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software.
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 9
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
A.
Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified
mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets. Locksets to be manufactured
with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum formed steel case and be field-reversible for handing
without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim (including knobs, levers, escutcheons, roses) to be the
product of a single manufacturer. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti-friction stainless steel
latchbolt, and a full 1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series.
2)
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series.
3)
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series.
4)
Or approved equal.
B.
Lock Trim Design: As specified in Hardware Sets.
2.7
AUXILIARY LOCKS
A.
2.8
Mortise Deadlocks, Small Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified small case mortise type deadlocks
constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. Steel or stainless steel bolts with a 1" throw and
hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other
specified locksets.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DL4100 Series.
2)
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 4870 Series.
3)
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 350 Series.
4)
Or approved equal.
LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A.
B.
2.9
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip
extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:
Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.
Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.
Standards: Comply with the following:
1.
Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.
2.
Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.
3.
Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A.
Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire
exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Mounting rails to be formed
from smooth stainless steel, brass or bronze architectural materials no less than 0.072" thick, with push rails a
minimum of 0.062" thickness. Painted or aluminum metal rails are not acceptable. Exit device latch to be
investment cast stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED5000 Series.
2)
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series.
3)
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 7000 Series.
4)
Or approved equal.
B.
Tube Steel Removable Mullions: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 removable steel mullions with malleable-iron top and
bottom retainers and a primed paint finish. Finish paint coat color selected by Architect, see Division 09.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 10
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Provide keyed removable feature, stabilizers, and mounting brackets as specified in the Hardware Sets. At
openings designed for severe wind load conditions due to hurricanes or tornadoes, provide manufacturers
approved mullion and accessories to meet applicable state and local windstorm codes.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - 700/900 Series.
2)
Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 980S Series.
3)
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - M200 Series.
4)
Or approved equal.
C.
2.10
High Wind Resistance Compliance: Electromechanical conventional exit devices and electrified tube steel
removable mullions to be U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable and in accordance with the
current version of the 2009 NJ Edition of IBC and the UCC Codes. Provide the appropriate hurricane or
tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state
and local windstorm building codes applicable to project.
DOOR CLOSERS
A.
Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty
door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable
according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece
cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for
closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units and high impact, non-corrosive plastic
covers standard.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series.
2)
Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series.
3)
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 4400 Series.
4)
Or approved equal.
B.
Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Unitrol): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, heavy
duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable
according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Unitrol arms to have door stop mechanism to
absorb dead stop shock on arm and top hinge. Hold-open arms to have a spring loaded mechanism in addition
to shock absorber assembly. Arms to be provided with rigid steel main arm and secondary arm lengths
proportional to the door width. Provide high impact, non-corrosive plastic covers standard.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - Unitrol DC8000 Series.
2)
Norton Door Controls (NO) - Unitrol 7500 Series.
3)
Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - Unitrol 4400 Series.
4)
Or approved equal.
2.11
A.
B.
C.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for
condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door
operation, hinges, and activation devices.
Electromechanical Door Operators: Self-contained units powered by permanent magnet DC motor, with
closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train, connections for power, activation and safety device
wiring, and manual operation including spring closing when power is off.
Electrohydraulic Door Operators: Self-contained low-pressure units with rack and pinion design contained
within a cast aluminum housing. Door closing speed controlled by independent hydraulic adjustment valves
in the sweep and latch range of the closing cycle. Operator is to provide conventional door closer opening
and closing forces unless the power operator motor is activated. Unit is to include an adjustable hydraulic
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 11
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2.12
A.
B.
2.13
A.
backcheck valve to cushion the door speed if opened violently. Non-handed units for both push and pull side
applications.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for
aligning system components.
Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
1.
Performance Requirements:
a.
Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided,
not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf
required to fully open door.
b.
Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing
or opening.
Configuration: Surface mounted. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors.
Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility
guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by
ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with
fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power.
Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed,
backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction
recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.
Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction,
electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.
Activation Devices: Provide activation devices in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard, for
condition of exposure indicated and for long term, maintenance free operation under normal traffic load
operation. Coordinate activation control with electrified hardware and access control interfaces. Activation
switches are standard SPST, with optional DPDT availability.
Signage: As required by cited ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standard for the type of operator.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Besam Automated Entrance Systems (BE) – SW200 Series.
2)
Horton Automatics (HO) - 4000 Series.
3)
Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series.
4)
Or approved equal.
DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.
Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide
wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door
stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or
wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1)
Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).
2)
Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
3)
Trimco (TC).
4)
Or approved equal.
ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
General: Thresholds, weather stripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weather strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or
sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners
and elsewhere where indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 12
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
B.
Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on
testing according to UL 1784.
1.
Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C.
Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing
according to UL-10C.
1.
Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D.
Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound
ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable
and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
2.
Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RS).
3.
Zero International (ZE).
4.
Or approved equal.
E.
F.
2.14
A.
2.15
A.
B.
C.
D.
FABRICATION
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for
machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation
standards for application intended.
FINISHES
Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with
ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain
manufacturers for their products.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other
qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards
for the applicable units of hardware.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective
covering before shipping.
Antimicrobial Finishes: Where specified, finishes on locksets, latchsets, exit devices and push/pull trim to
incorporate an FDA recognized. Silver Ion, antimicrobial coating (MicroShield™) listed for use on
equipment as a suppressant to the growth and spread of a broad range of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and
mildew.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which products are to be installed in coordination with
Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify the General Contractor in writing,
with copies to the Owner’s Representative and Architect, of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely
installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to Installer.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 13
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1.
Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment
of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices;
and seals.
B.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications,
unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2.
Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
3.
Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.
C.
Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written
instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later
to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective
trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until
finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the
handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by
hardware losses before and after installation.
D.
E.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.5
When Installer confirms conditions as acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation and to ensure
requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied, submit to General Contractor written
confirmation, with copies to the Owner’s Representative and Architect, from applicable Installer. Failure to
submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will be assumed to indicate conditions are acceptable
to Installer.
Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions
affecting performance.
Examine and confirm all hardware systems and components have been coordinated with security access
control, fire alarm, video surveillance systems including the appropriate rough in work (concealed in walls)
required for the systems to operate. Confirm security integration has been completed.
Notify Architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and
scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.
Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report
whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly
installed, operating and adjusted.
ADJUSTING
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 14
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
A.
3.6
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper
operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door
control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with
referenced accessibility requirements.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.7
Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware
installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish and provide final protection and maintain
conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.
Dispose of all waste legally.
Comply with waste management and recycling requirements.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
3.8
Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical
door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A.
B.
The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline
only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and
missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding
process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional
hardware required for proper application and functionality.
Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney
2. MR - Markar
3. RO - Rockwood
4. RU - Corbin Russwin
5. MC - Medeco
6. NO - Norton
7. PE - Pemko
8. SU - Securitron
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 15
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Hardware Schedule
Set: 1.0
Doors: 101
2
1
1
1
2
Continuous Hinge
Removable Mullion
Exit Device (rim, exit only)
Exit Device (rim, nightlatch)
Mortise Cylinder
1 Rim Cylinder
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
Door Pull
Door Operator
Threshold
Sweep
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Controller
Wall Actuator
Actuator with Post
FM300 x LAR CTP
910KM x LAR
ED5200 C M110 M52 M92 M94
ED5200 C M110 M92 M94 M52 K157
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
10N030010n0400 x tail piece as required
GMK
BF168 Mtg-Type 5
6060 D
2009AT x LAR MSES25SS
3452CNB x LAR
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
782
555 (with surface mount box)
500 – post with hard wired switch (505)
630
630
630
26
MR
RU
RU
RU
MC
26
MC
US32D-MS RO
689
NO
PE
PE
MK
MK
689
SU
RU
NO
NO
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to retract exit device latch at active door allowing manual entry or automatic operator by wall actuator mounted i5
post. Inside, Free egress at all times by exit device or automatic operator by wall actuator. Key override. Perimeter and
meeting stile gasket by door / frame manufacturer.
Set: 2.0
Doors: 102
2
2
2
2
2
Continuous Hinge
Push Bar
Door Pull
Door Operator
Wall Actuator
FM300 x LAR
47 Mtg-Type 5
BF168 Mtg-Type 5
6060 D
555 (with surface mount box)
630
US32D-MS
US32D-MS
689
MR
RO
RO
NO
NO
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, automatic operator by wall actuator. Inside, Free egress at all
times by push bar or automatic operator by wall actuator. Perimeter and meeting stile gasket by door / frame
manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 16
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 3.0
Doors: 112A, 114A, 115A, 125A, 125H, 126A, 127C
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Exit Device (rim, storeroom)
1 Mortise Cylinder
1 Rim Cylinder
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Door Closer
Kickplate
Threshold
Sweep
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Controller
FM300 x LAR CTP
ED5200 123957 C M110 M92 M94 M52
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
10N030010n0400 x tail piece as required
GMK
UNI7500H
K1050 10" high 4BE
2009AT x LAR MSES25SS
3452CNB x LAR
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
782
630
630
26
MR
RU
MC
26
MC
689
US32D
NO
RO
PE
PE
MK
MK
SU
RU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to retract exit device latch allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by exit device. Key override. Perimeter
gasket by frame manufacturer.
Set: 4.0
Doors: 127B
1 Continuous Hinge
1 Exit Device (rim, storeroom)
1 Mortise Cylinder
1 Rim Cylinder
1
1
1
1
1
Door Closer
Kickplate
Threshold
Sweep
Door Contact
FM300 x LAR
ED5200 123957 C
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
10N030010n0400 x tail piece as required
GMK
UNI7500H
K1050 10" high 4BE
2009AT x LAR MSES25SS
3452CNB x LAR
by security vendor
Notes: Perimeter gasket by frame manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 17
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
630
630
26
MR
RU
MC
26
MC
689
US32D
NO
RO
PE
PE
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 5.0
Doors: 110A, 113A, 129A
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
Continuous Hinge
Continuous Hinge
Manual Flush Bolt
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Threshold
Sweep
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
Latch Protector
FM300 x LAR
FM300 x LAR CTP
555
ML20905 123R C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
UNI7500H
K1050 10" high 4BE
2009AT x LAR MSES25SS
3452CNB x LAR
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
321
630
630
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MR
MR
RO
RU
MC
NO
RO
PE
PE
MK
MK
SU
SU
RO
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override. Perimeter and
meeting stile gasket by door / frame manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 18
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 6.0
Doors: 111A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Continuous Hinge
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Threshold
Sweep
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
1 Power Supply
FM300 x LAR CTP
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
UNI7500H
K1050 10" high 4BE
2009AT x LAR MSES25SS
3452CNB x LAR
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
630
626
26
689
US32D
MR
RU
MC
NO
RO
PE
PE
MK
MK
SU
BPS (size & type as required)
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override. Perimeter gasket
by frame manufacturer.
Set: 7.0
Doors: 112B, 201, 213
3
1
1
2
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Exit Device (rim, passage)
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ED5200A 123910 C M110
7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 19
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
US26D
630
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
NO
RO
RO
PE
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 8.0
Doors: 114B
3 Hinge (heavy weight)
1 Exit Device (rim, fail secure)
1 Mortise Cylinder
1 Rim Cylinder
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Door Closer
Kickplate
Gasketing
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ED5200 1239905 C M110 M52 M92
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
10N030010n0400 x tail piece as required
GMK
CLP7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
S88D (Head & Jambs)
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
US26D
630
26
MK
RU
MC
26
MC
689
US32D
NO
RO
PE
MK
MK
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by exit device. Key override.
Set: 9.0
Doors: 116
3 Hinge (heavy weight)
1 Exit Device (rim, fail safe)
1 Rim Cylinder
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Door Closer
Kickplate
Gasketing
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ED5200A 1239903 C M110 M92
10N030010n0400 x tail piece as required
GMK
CLP7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
S88D (Head & Jambs)
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
US26D
630
MK
RU
26
MC
689
US32D
NO
RO
PE
MK
MK
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail safe lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by exit device. Key override.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 20
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 10.0
Doors: 117, 124, 209
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
Hinge
Mortise Lock (storeroom)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML2057 123X C LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
PE
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML2051 123X C LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
608
US26D
626
26
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
RO
RO
RO
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML2051 123X C LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
406
US26D
626
26
US32D
MK
RU
MC
RO
Set: 11.0
Doors: 106, 108
3
1
1
2
1
3
Hinge
Mortise Lock (office)
Mortise Cylinder
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Silencer
Set: 12.0
Doors: 203, 204, 205
3
1
1
1
Hinge
Mortise Lock (office)
Mortise Cylinder
Wall Stop
Notes: Perimeter gasket by frame manufacturer.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 21
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 13.0
Doors: 126C
3
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
RO
MK
MK
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override.
Set: 14.0
Doors: 128B
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
Continuous Hinge
Mortise Lock (classroom)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
Auto Door Bottom
FM300 x LAR
ML2055 123X C LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
PR7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
PDB411A x LAR
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 22
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
630
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MR
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
PE
PE
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 15.0
Doors: 129B
6
2
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
8
Hinge
Manual Flush Bolt
Dust Proof Strike
Mortise Lock (classroom)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Silencer
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
555
570
ML2055 123X C LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
CLP7500
PR7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
608
US26D
US26D
US26D
626
26
689
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RO
RO
RU
MC
NO
NO
RO
RO
RO
3 Hinge (heavy weight)
T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
US26D
MK
1 Exit Device (rim, fail safe)
ED5200A 1239903 C M110 M92
10N030010n0400 x tail piece as required
GMK
PR7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
630
RU
26
MC
689
US32D
US32D
NO
RO
RO
PE
MK
MK
Set: 16.0
Doors: 212
1 Rim Cylinder
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Corridor 218, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals
power supply to release fail safe lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 23
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 17.0
Doors: 105, 220A, 220B
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
Door Bottom
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
PR7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
PDB4131CE x LAR
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
PE
PE
MK
MK
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Pull side, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override.
Set: 18.0
Doors: 111B, 215
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
PE
MK
MK
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 24
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 19.0
Doors: 104A
3
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Silencer
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
1 Power Supply
T4A3786 NRP 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
PR7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
608
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
RO
MK
MK
SU
BPS (size & type as required)
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Garage 125, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals
power supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override.
Set: 20.0
Doors: 109, 113B
3
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Silencer
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
608
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 25
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
RO
MK
MK
SU
SU
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override.
Set: 21.0
Doors: 110B
6
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
4
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Flush Bolt
Dust Proof Strike
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Coordinator
Mounting Bracket
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
Door Bottom
Astragal
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
2842 / 2962
570
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
2600 Series (size as req) x Wear Plates
2601AB / C (type as req)
PR7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
PDB4131CE x LAR
S771C x LAR
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
US26D
US26D
US26D
626
26
Black
Black
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RO
RO
RU
MC
RO
RO
NO
RO
RO
PE
PE
PE
MK
MK
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 26
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 22.0
Doors: 214
6
2
1
1
1
2
4
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Manual Flush Bolt
Dust Proof Strike
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Silencer
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
555
570
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
PR7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
608
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
US26D
US26D
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RO
RO
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
RO
MK
MK
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 27
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 23.0
Doors: 103 (no wall stop), 206, 216, 217
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hinge
Mortise Lock (fail secure)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop (at 206, 216, 217 only)
eLynx Frame Harness
eLynx Door Harness
Door Contact
Wiring Diagram
Card Reader w/ Keypad
Electric Power Transfer
Power Supply
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML20905 123X C 24AD M92 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
QC-C1500P
QC-C*** (Length / Type as Required)
by security vendor
Point to Point
by security vendor
EL-CEPT
BPS (size & type as required)
US26D
626
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
MK
MK
SU
SU
Notes: Electronic opening to operate as follows: Outside, Card reader or keypad (furnished by security) signals power
supply to release fail secure lever allowing entry. Inside, Free egress at all times by lever. Key override. Perimeter gasket
by frame manufacturer. Coordinate kickplate with door bottom.
Set: 24.0
Doors: 207, 208, 210
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Mortise Lock (classroom, paddle)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML2055 HPSK C LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
US26D
630
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
PE
T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
ML2055 HPSK C LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
PR7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
S88D (Head & Jambs)
US26D
630
26
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
NO
RO
RO
PE
Set: 25.0
Doors: 211A, 211B
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
Hinge (heavy weight)
Mortise Lock (classroom, paddle)
Mortise Cylinder
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Gasketing
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 28
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Set: 26.0
Doors: 120, 123, 223, 224
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
Hinge (heavy weight)
Mortise Deadbolt
Mortise Cylinder
Push Plate
Pull Plate
Door Closer
Kickplate
Wall Stop
Silencer
T4A3786 4-1/2" x 4-1/2"
DL4117 LC
10N0200 x Length / Cam as Req. GMK
70C
110x70C
7500
K1050 10" high 4BE
406
608
Set: 27.0
All Overhead Doors
Notes: All hardware by door supplier.
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - Page 29
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
US26D
626
26
US32D-MS
US32D-MS
689
US32D
US32D
MK
RU
MC
RO
RO
NO
RO
RO
RO
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SECTION 221500 - GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Compressed air piping.
2. Flexible connectors.
3. Compressed air outlets.
4. Air compressor.
5. Refrigerated compressed air dryer.
6. Air receiver.
7. Pressure regulators.
8. Compressed air filters.
9. Hose connectors.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for equipment bases
specified by this section.
2. Section 220503 - Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product and
installation requirements for piping materials applying to various system types.
3. Section 220513 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment: Product
requirements for equipment motors for placement by this section.
4. Section 220523 - General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping: Product requirements for valves
for placement by this section.
5. Section 2205 9 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product
requirements for pipe hangers and supports and firestopping for placement by this section.
6. Section 220553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for
pipe and valve identification for placement by this section.
REFERENCES
A.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate piping system schematic with electrical and connection requirements
general assembly of components, mounting and installation details, and general layout of control
and alarm panels.
Product Data:
1. System Components: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity,
component sizes, rough-in requirements, and service sizes. When applicable, include
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
2. Compressors: Submit type, capacity, and performance characteristics. Include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
221500- Page 1
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hoisting and setting requirements, starting
procedures.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
Procedure: Comply with submittal requirements indicated below and as stipulated in 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for each component of system specified,
including product specifications and installation instructions.
1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications, application
instructions, product storage and handling requirements, and similar data for each product
specified below as required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and
provide complete application information.
Shop Drawings: Included plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, terminations, fasteners
and attachments to other work.
Samples: for each product provide color and texture samples requested by Architect.
1. Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer’s color sheets and small-scale samples indicating
manufacturer’s full range of colors and textures for selection by Architect.
2. Verification: Submit 8-inch x 8-inch samples for each finish, color and texture selected;
prepare samples using same tools and techniques intended for actual work.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
Field quality-control test reports.
Product certificates and test reports.
Research / evaluation reports.
Maintenance data.
Sustainability / Environmental Submittals: Show evidence including, but not limited to the
following:
1. Recycled content – documentation showing product supports pre and post – consumer
content.
2. Indoor Environmental Quality – product in VOC compliant in the state and jurisdiction the
project is located.
3. Proposed products are manufactured within a 500-mile radius of the project site and are
considered to be a locally produced material which supports regional materials and resources.
4. Comply with recycling program and waste management procedures.
N.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with the applicable sections noted in DIVISION 1,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Requirements of 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES;
2. Submission of maintenance instructions described in 017823 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA;
3. Record documents as described in 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS;
4. Demonstration and training requirements indicated in 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
O.
Quality Control Submittals:
1. Qualifications Certification: Submit written certification or similar documentation signed by
applicable subcontractor, Prime Contractor and manufacturer indicating compliance with
applicable “Qualifications” requirements specified below.
2. Installer Experience Listing: Submit list of completed projects using products proposed for
this Project, including owner’s contact and telephone number for each project, demonstrating
compliance with requirements specified below.
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
221500- Page 2
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
1.4
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.6
B.
Accept equipment on site in factory fabricated containers with shipping skids and plastic pipe end
protectors in place. Inspect for damage.
WARRANTY
A.
1.9
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years’ experience.
Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years’
experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.8
Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME
Section IX for welding materials and procedures.
Perform Work in accordance with the following:
1. State of New Jersey Department of Transportation.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.7
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment piping, valves, outlets and
components.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit assembly views, lubrication instructions, replacement
part numbers and availability.
Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pumps, compressors, refrigerated dryers and valves
excluding packing.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish six quart containers of compressor oil.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES, TUBES AND FITTINGS
A.
2.2
See Section 220503 for piping materials to be used.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
2. Flexonics Model.
3. The Metraflex Company Model.
4. Or approved equal.
B.
2 inches and Smaller: Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior
braiding, Schedule 40 ends; maximum working pressure 150 psig, threaded or soldered
connections.
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
221500- Page 3
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
C.
2.3
2.4
COMPRESSED AIR OUTLETS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Aeroquip, Inc.
2. Swagelok Co.
3. Or approved equal.
B.
Compressed Air Outlets: Quick Connector: 3/8 inch brass, snap on connector with self closing
valve.
AIR COMPRESSOR
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Copco
2. Gardner Denver
3. Ingersol Rand.
4. Or approved equal.
B.
Air Compressor: Simplex vertical tank mounted compressor unit consisting of air-cooled
compressor, air receiver, after cooler and operating controls. Size and capacity as indicated on the
drawings.
Rotary Screw Type:
1. Unit: Rotary Screw Type Compressors see schedule on drawings for motor HP, and required
air capacity and pressure requirements.
2. Furnish with wall mounted alternating controller, provide with air-line pre-filter, oil
coalescing after filter, oil/water separator, refrigerated dryer and zero air-loss, drain mounted
in compressor enclosure. See drawings for capacity and model number.
C.
2.5
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2-1/2 inches and Larger: Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior
braiding, Class 150 flanged ends; maximum working pressure 150 psig.
REFRIGERATED COMPRESSED AIR DRYER
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Hankinson.
2. Ingersoll Rand Corp.
3. ZEKS Compressed Air Solutions.
4. Or approved equal.
B.
Refrigerated Air Dryer: Self-contained mechanical refrigeration type complete with heat
exchanger, refrigeration compressor, automatic controls, moisture removal trap, internal wiring
and piping, and full refrigerant charge.
Air Connections: Inlet and outlet connections at same level, factory insulated.
Heat Exchangers: Air to air and refrigerant to air coils. Furnish heat exchangers with automatic
control system to bypass refrigeration system on low or no load condition.
Moisture Separator: Centrifugal type located at discharge of heat exchanger.
Refrigeration Unit: Hermetically sealed type to operate continuously to maintain specified 21
degrees F dew point. House unit in steel cabinet with access door and panel for maintenance and
inspection.
Accessories: Air inlet temperature gage, air inlet pressure gage, on/off switch, high temperature
light, power on light, refrigerant gage , air outlet temperature gage, air outlet pressure gage.
Capacity:
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
221500- Page 4
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
1.
2.6
I.
Electrical Characteristics:
1. 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.
J.
Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box.
AIR RECEIVER
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Champion.
2. Gardner Denver
3. Quincy Compressor.
4. Or approved equal.
B.
Air Receiver: Horizontal, built to ASME Section VIII regulations for working pressure of 200 psi.
Flange or screw inlet and outlet connections.
Fittings: Adjustable pressure regulator, safety valve, pressure gage, drain valve, and automatic
float actuated condensate trap.
Tank Finish: Hot dipped galvanized or factory painted
The tank is to have the same manufacturer as the compressor.
Size:
1. See schedule on drawings for tank capacity.
.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.7
PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Fisher.
2. Watts.
3. Norgren.
4. Or approved equal.
B.
Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm operated, bronze body, direct acting, spring loaded, manual
pressure setting adjustment, rated for 250 psig inlet pressure.
Pressure Regulators: Aluminum alloy or plastic body, diaphragm operated, direct acting, spring
loaded, manual pressure setting adjustment, and rated for 250 psig inlet pressure.
C.
2.8
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
As indicated on the drawings
COMPRESSED AIR FILTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Watts.
2. Fisher.
3. Norgren.
4. Or approved equal.
B.
Coalescing Filters: Furnish with activated carbon capable of removing water and oil aerosols, with
color-change dye indicating when carbon is saturated and warning light indicating when maximum
pressure drop has been exceeded.
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
221500- Page 5
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
2.9
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
HOSE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Metraflex.
2. Aeroquip.
3. Or approved equal.
B.
Hose Connectors: Corrugated stainless steel tubing with stainless steel wire braid covering and
ends welded to inner tubing.
Working Pressure: 250 psig minimum.
End Connections:
1. 2 inches and Smaller: Threaded steel pipe nipple.
2. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Class 150 Flanges.
C.
D.
2.10
2.11
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Ashcroft by Dresser Industries, Instrument Division Model 1005
2. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
3. Watts Regulator Co.
4. Or approved equal.
B.
Gage: ASME B40.1, with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front calibration
adjustment, black scale on white background.
1. Case: Steel Cast aluminum ABS.
2. Bourdon Tube: Bronze.
3. Dial Size: 3-1/2 inch diameter.
4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: Two percent.
5. Scale: PSI.
BIMETAL DIAL TEMPERATURE INDICATORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. H.O. Trerice Co. Model BX91403.
2. Weiss Instruments.
3. Weksler Division of Ashcroft, Inc.
4. Or approved equal.
B.
Description:
1. Mounting: Direct mounted universal angle bimetal dial thermometer.
2. Case: Stainless steel with 5 inch diameter glass lens.
3. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180 degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
4. Element: Bimetal coil.
5. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
6. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.0
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which products are to be installed in
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
221500- Page 6
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
B.
3.1
APPROVALS AND PERMITS
A.
B.
3.2
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.
INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING - COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
3.4
Notify regulating agencies regarding activities installation of pressure vessels.
Obtain and pay fees for licenses, permits, and inspections required for installation of pressure
vessels.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify
General Contractor in writing, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner and Architect, of
any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
When Installer confirms conditions as acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation and to
ensure requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied, submit to General
Contractor written confirmation, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner and Architect,
from applicable Installer. Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will
be assumed to indicate conditions are acceptable to Installer.
Install drip connections with valves at low points of piping system.
Install take-off to outlets from top of main, with shut off valve after takeoff. Slope take-off piping
to outlets.
Install compressed air couplings, female quick connectors, and pressure gages as indicated on
Drawings.
Install tees instead of elbows at changes in direction of piping. Fit open end of each tee with plug.
Cut pipe and tubing accurately and install without springing or forcing.
Slope piping in direction of flow.
Install pipe sleeves where pipes and tubing pass through walls, floors, roofs, and partitions. Refer
to Section 220529.
Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating
sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 220529.
Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 220553.
Except where indicated, install manual shut off valves with stem vertical and accessible for
operation and maintenance.
Install strainers on inlet side of pressure reducing valves. Install pressure reducing valves with
bypasses and isolation valves to allow maintenance without interruption of service.
Install strainers on inlet side of pressure regulators.
Install pressure gauges on the compressor tank outlet, on the inlet and outlet of all filters and at
each point-of-use drop.
Install temperature indicator at refrigerated air dryer outlet.
INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
Install air compressor on concrete housekeeping pad, minimum 4 inches high and 4 inches larger
than compressor base on each side. Refer to Section 033000.
Install air compressor unit on vibration isolators. Level and bolt in place.
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
221500- Page 7
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
3.6
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Install line size shut-off valve and check valve on compressor discharge.
Install replaceable cartridge type filter silencer for each compressor.
Install condensate drain piping to nearest floor drain.
Install bypass with valves around air dryer. Use factory insulated inlet and outlet connections.
Provide full size bypass with valves, around receivers.
Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air piping
in accordance with ASME B31.9.
Verify for atmospheric pressure in piping systems, other than system under test.
Test system with dry compressed air or dry nitrogen with test pressure in piping system at 200 psi.
CLEANING
A.
Blow systems clear of free moisture and foreign matter.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
221500- Page 8
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.3
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for the description of commissioning.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
This section includes but is not limited to, commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R
systems, assemblies, and equipment.
Related Sections:
1. Section 01 91 00 Commissioning
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
3. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
4. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for definitions.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Procedure: Comply with submittal requirements indicated below, and as stipulated in 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, and in 019100 Commissioning.
Product Data General: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications, application instructions, product storage and handling requirements, and similar data for each product
specified below as required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and provide
complete application information.
1. Product Data: Provide information for each type of product specified.
C.
Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work to describe the work.
1. Manufacturer to propose spacing and layout of supporting devices including heights, spacing,
and frequency.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
Maintenance data.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
Sustainability / Environmental Submittals: Show evidence including but not limited to the following:
1. Proposed products are manufactured within a 500-mile radius of the project site and are considered to be a locally produced material which supports regional materials and resources.
H.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with the applicable sections noted in DIVISION 01, including but limited to the following:
1. Requirements of 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 1
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
2.
3.
4.
1.6
I.
Provide the following:
1. Certificates of readiness
2. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.
3. O&M manuals
4. Test reports
J.
Control Drawings Submittal
1. The control drawings shall have a key to all abbreviations.
2. The control drawings shall contain graphic schematic depictions of the systems and each component.
3. The schematics will include the system and component layout of any equipment that the control system monitors, enables or controls, even if the equipment is primarily controlled by
packaged or integral controls.
4. Provide a full points list with at least the following included for each point:
a. Controlled system
b. Point abbreviation
c. Point description
d. Display unit
e. Control point or set point (Yes / No)
f. Monitoring point (Yes / No)
g. Intermediate point (Yes / No)
h. Calculated point (Yes / No)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Submission of maintenance instructions described in 017823 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA;
Record documents as described in 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS;
Demonstration and training requirements indicated in 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test equipment manufacturer’s calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test
instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request.
COORDINATION
A.
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for requirements pertaining to coordination during
the commissioning process.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TEST EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being tested. For example,
the mechanical contractor of Division 23 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing
equipment for the HVAC&R system and controls system in Division 23, except for equipment
specific to and used by TAB contractor in their responsibilities. A sufficient quantity of two-way
radios shall be provided by each subcontractor.
Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from
vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site,
except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA. A list of any such
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 2
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
C.
D.
E.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
special equipment shall be provided to the Commissioning Authority and the Commissioning
Kick-off Meeting.
Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. A list of any such special
equipment shall be provided to the Commissioning Authority and the Commissioning Kick-off
Meeting.
Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the CxA, but
shall not become the property of the Owner.
All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following
minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of + or - 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full
range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which products are to be installed in coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify General
Contractor in writing, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner, and Architect, of any
conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer
When Installer confirms conditions as acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation and to
ensure requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied, submit to General Contractor written confirmation, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner, and Architect,
from applicable Installer. Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will
be assumed to indicate conditions are acceptable to Installer
GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for
all commissioned components, equipment, and systems
Red-lined Drawings:
1. The contractor will verify all equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and components
are shown correctly on red-lined drawings.
2. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the Commissioning Team for use
prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing.
3. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings.
4. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the as-built drawings.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 10 days of each submittal acceptance
for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems.
2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements.
3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been
made by the Contractor.
D.
Demonstration and Training:
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 3
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
3.3
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. Refer to
Section 017900 Demonstration and Training for more detail.
A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the contractor to the CxA in accordance with Section 017900 Demonstration and Training.four weeks (4) prior to any training
A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA in accordance with
Section 017900 Demonstration and Training.one (1) week prior the training session
The CxA shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled tests so that testing may
be observed by the CxA and Owner's representative. A copy of the test record shall be provided to the CxA, Owner, and Architect.
Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain specific equipment as required by submitted and approved training plan.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,
trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment as required by submitted and approved training plan.
Review data in O&M Manuals.
Systems manual requirements:
1. The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource for the building systems
operator containing all of the information related to the systems, assemblies, and Commissioning Process in one place with indexes and cross references. Additionally it will serve as
the basis for future Recommissioning of the building systems to ensure optimal operation and
durability over the life of the building.
2. The GC shall include final approved versions of the following information for the Systems
Manual:
a. As-Built System Schematics
b. Verified Record Drawings
c. Test Results (not otherwise included in Cx Record)
d. Periodic Maintenance Information for computer maintenance management system
e. Recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and actuators
f. A list of contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, architects, and engineers involved in the
project along with their contact information
g. Training Records, Information on training provided, attendees list, and any on-going
training
3. This information shall be organized and arranged by building system, such as cooling system,
heating system, ventilation system etc.
4. Information should be provided in an electronic version to the extent possible. Legible,
scanned images are acceptable for non-electronic documentation to facilitate this deliverable.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Mechanical, Controls and TAB Contractors. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to
each of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors of Division 23 are as follows (all references
apply to commissioned equipment only):
Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.
Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings.
Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meetings.
Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation
and inspection as directed by the CxA.
Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.
Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 4
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
3.4
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Prepare preliminary schedule for Mechanical system orientations and inspections, operation and
maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, pipe and duct system testing, flushing and
cleaning, equipment start-up, testing and balancing and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members.
Update schedule as required throughout the construction period.
During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of the prefunctional
checklists for all commissioned equipment.
Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests.
Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.
Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required
by the specifications. Submit to CxA (1045) days after submittal acceptance.
Coordinate with the CxA to provide (48) hour advance notice so that the witnessing of equipment
and system start-up and testing can begin.
Notify the CxA a minimum of (2) weeks in advance of the time for start of the testing and balancing work. Attend the initial testing and balancing meeting for review of the official testing and
balancing procedures.
Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training sessions.
Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA Authority that the following work has been
completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and subsystem are operating as required.
1. Installation of HVAC&R equipment including all fans, air handling units, ductwork, dampers,
terminals, and all other equipment furnished under this Division.
The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment.
Provide a complete set of red-lined drawings to the CxA prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing.
Test, Adjust and Balance Contractor
1. Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting scheduled by the Commissioning Authority.
2. Submit the site specific testing and balancing plan to the CxA and AE for review and acceptance.
3. Attend the testing and balancing review meeting scheduled by the CxA. Be prepared to discuss the procedures that shall be followed in testing, adjusting, and balancing the HVAC&R
system.
4. At the completion of the testing and balancing work, and the submittal of the final testing and
balancing report, notify the HVAC&R contractor and the CM/GC.
5. At the completion of testing and balancing work, and the submittal of the final testing and
balancing report, notify the HVAC&R Contractor and the CM/GC.
6. Participate in verification of the testing and balancing report, which will consist of repeating
measurements contained in the testing and balancing reports. Assist in diagnostic purposes
when directed.
U.
V.
Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified.
Equipment Suppliers
1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force.
2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors.
3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing
procedures.
W.
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for additional contractor responsibilities.
OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 5
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
A.
3.5
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
3.6
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Certify in writing to the CxA that Prefunctional Checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems,
and equipment have been completed.
Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.
Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest
set points have been recorded.
Certify in writing that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that
testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and
alarm conditions).
Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.
Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during
each mode of operation.
Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as
directed by the CxA.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION
A.
B.
C.
3.9
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for CxA’s Responsibilities.
TESTING PREPARATION
A.
3.8
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for Design Professional’s Responsibilities.
CXA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
3.7
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for Owner’s Responsibilities.
Prior to performance of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work, provide copies of reports, sample
forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.
Notify the CxA at least ten (10) days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.
1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing subcontractor ten (10) days in advance of the date
of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be verified.
2. The testing and balancing subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial
number) that were used when original data were collected.
3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of
more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting, and
balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of
final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.
4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed.
GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of
the CxA.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 6
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
3.10
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment for
heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing
shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.
Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency
conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.
The CxA along with the HVAC&R contractor, testing and balancing Subcontractor, and
HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.
Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to
test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide
equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.
The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.
The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.
If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system,
document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule
tests.
If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance
tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual
Division 23 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and certifications to the CxA.
HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.
Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment: Test requirements are
specified in Division 23 piping Sections. HVAC&R Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan
and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:
1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by
pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe
sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to
pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing,
and chemical treatment plan.
2. Description of equipment for flushing operations.
3. Minimum flushing water velocity.
4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,
flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.
Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test
performance of chillers, cooling towers, refrigerant compressors and condensers, heat pumps, and
other refrigeration systems. Test requirements are specified in Division 23 piping Sections
HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and
other distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment.
Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 7
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
G.
3.11
DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO
MANUFACTURER DEFECT
A.
3.12
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for requirements pertaining to deferred testing.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
B.
C.
3.15
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for approval procedures.
DEFERRED TESTING
A.
3.14
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/nonconformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect.
APPROVAL
A.
3.13
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of
the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated:
1. Air Cooled Condensing Unit
2. Air Handling Unit
3. Air Terminal
4. Boiler
5. Ductwork
6. Exhaust Fan
7. Glycol Make-up System
8. Hot Water System
9. Piping
10. Pump
11. VAV Terminal
12. VFD
13. Hydronic Piping System (as it relates to Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) requirements.
14. Radiant Heating System
15. Hot Water Heating Pumps
16. Refrigerant Piping System
17. Duct Systems (as it relates to Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) requirements.
18. Automatic Temperature Control Systems
19. IT Room Ductless Split Systems
20. CO Detection Systems
21. NO2 Detection Systems
The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as
stated in Division 01.
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” for the AE and CxA roles in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process.
An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included
in the final controls O&M manual submittal.
TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL
A.
B.
Refer to Division 01 Section “Commissioning” and 017900 Demonstration and Training for requirements pertaining to training.
Mechanical Contractor. The mechanical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 8
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
1. Provide the CxA with a training plan four weeks before the planned training. Training plans
must be submitted to CxA for review and approval ...
2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of HVAC equipment including, but not limited to, all HVAC equipment (ex. pumps, heat exchangers, chillers,
heat rejection equipment, air conditioning units, air handling units, fans, terminal units, controls and water treatment systems, etc.)
3. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on each
piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup,
shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.
4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted
as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each
major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer’s representative. Practical building operating
expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of
equipment is required. More than one party may be required to execute the training.
6. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to
discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed.
7. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and
maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference.
8. Training shall include:
a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in
the O&M manuals.
b. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory
suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shutdown, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.
c. Trending of utility meters.
d. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.
e. Discussion of warranties and guarantees.
f. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
g. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and
manuals in the facility.
h. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
i. The format and training agenda in The HVAC Commissioning Process, ASHRAE Guideline 1-2007, is recommended.
9. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual,
shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of
equipment.
10. The mechanical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and
overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system.
11. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the
Owner.
C.
Controls Contractor. The controls contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1. Provide the CxA and AE with a training plan four weeks before the planned training.
2. The controls contractor shall provide designated Owner personnel training on the control system in this facility. The intent is to clearly and completely instruct the Owner on all the capabilities of the control system.
3. Training manuals. The standard operating manual for the system and any special training
manuals will be provided for each trainee, with three extra copies left for the O&M manuals.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 9
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
In addition, copies of the system technical manual will be demonstrated during training and
three copies submitted with the O&M manuals. Manuals shall include detailed description of
the subject matter for each session. The manuals will cover all control sequences and have a
definitions section that fully describes all relevant words used in the manuals and in all software displays. Manuals will be approved by the CxA and AE. Copies of audiovisuals shall
be delivered to the Owner.
The trainings will be tailored to the needs and skill-level of the trainees.
The trainers will be knowledgeable on the system and its use in buildings. For the on-site sessions, the most qualified trainer(s) will be used. The Owner shall approve the instructor prior
to scheduling the training.
During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted
as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to
discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed.
There shall be three (3) training sessions:
a. Training I. Control System. The first training shall consist of 8 hours of actual training.
This training may be held on-site or in the supplier’s facility. If held off-site, the training
may occur prior to final completion of the system installation. Upon completion, each
student, using appropriate documentation, should be able to perform elementary operations and describe general hardware architecture and functionality of the system.
b. Training II. Building Systems. The second session shall be held on-site for a period of 8
hours of actual hands-on training after the completion of system commissioning. The
session shall include instruction on:
(1) Specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this building and specific
instruction for operating the installed system, including HVAC systems, lighting
controls and any interface with security and communication systems.
(2) Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage and restart routines, changing set points and alarms and other typical changed parameters, overrides, freeze protection, manual operation of equipment, optional control strategies
that can be considered, energy savings strategies and set points that if changed will
adversely affect energy consumption, energy accounting, procedures for obtaining
vendor assistance, etc.
(3) All trending and monitoring features (values, change of state, totalization, etc.), including setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular and graphically and
printing trends. Trainees will actually set-up trends in the presence of the trainer.
(4) Every screen shall be completely discussed, allowing time for questions.
(5) Use of keypad or plug-in laptop computer at the zone level.
(6) Use of remote access to the system via phone lines or networks.
(7) Setting up and changing an air terminal unit controller.
(8) Graphics generation
(9) Point database entry and modifications
(10) Understanding DDC field panel operating programming (when applicable)
c. Training III. The third training will be conducted on-site six months after occupancy and
consist of 8 hours of training. The session will be structured to address specific topics
that trainees need to discuss and to answer questions concerning operation of the system.
TAB. The TAB contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1. TAB shall meet for 4 hours with facility staff after completion of TAB and instruct them on
the following:
a. Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type.
b. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may affect the
proper delivery of air or water.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 10
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
c. Identify and discuss any terminal units, duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that
are close to or are not meeting their design capacity.
d. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not finished.
e. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB.
END OF SECTION
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
230800 – Page 11
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SECTION 230923 – DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
BMS – Building Management System
BACnet – Building Automation and Control Network
NAC – Network Area Controller
JACE – Java Application Control Engine
GUI – Graphical User Interface
LAN – Local Area Network
WAN – Wide Area Network
PIC Statement – Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
NiCS – Niagara Compatibility Statement
HTML – Hypertext Markup Language
XML – Extensible Markup Language
PDF- Portable Document Format
ODBC – Open Database Connectivity
SQL – Structured Query Language
QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 01 Section “Construction Waste Management”
2. Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning
3. Division 23 Section “Commissioning of HVAC Systems”
4. Division 23 Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC”
5. Division 26 Section “Wire, Cable and Connectors”
ABBREVIATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
1.4
The General Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. Subcontractor must familiarize himself with the terms of the above documents.
American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001
2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet and LONMARK
3. ANSI standard EIA 709.1
4. ANSI MC85.1 – Terminology for Automatic Control.
All bidders must be building automation contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 3 years.
All bidders must have an office within 60 miles of the project.
All bidders must be authorized distributors or branch offices of the manufacturers specified.
All bidders must have a trained staff of application engineers, who have been certified by the manufacturer in the configuration, programming and service of the automation system.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The entire Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable,
stand-alone digital controllers communicating via BACnet™ communication protocols to a Network Area Controller (NAC) (Also known as a JACE- Java Application Control Engine).
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 1
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a Network Area Controller
(NAC) or Controllers within each facility. More than one controller shall not be utilized unless
the number of points needed exceeds the capacity of one Network Area Controller (NAC). The
NAC shall connect to the owner’s local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Access to the system, either locally in each building, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be
accomplished through standard Web browsers, and/or local area network. Each NAC shall communicate to BACnet™ controllers and other open protocol systems/devices.
The BMS shall be based on a hierarchical architecture incorporating the NiagaraAX Framework™. Coordinate version of software with owner. Systems not developed on the NiagaraAX
Framework™ platform are unacceptable.
The BMS shall monitor and control equipment as called for by the “Sequence of Operation” and
points list.
The BMS shall provide full graphic software capable of complete system operation for up to 34
simultaneous Thin-Client workstations.
The BMS shall provide full Graphical User Interface (GUI). A basis of design on the format of the
GUI will be provided by the Authority upon award of contract. The BMS vendor is required to
provide any additional graphics as necessary to provide a complete GUI. GUI shall be integrated
directly into the JACE. The GUI shall will include the following graphics as a minimum:
1. Home page to include a minimum of critical points for each system represented on the BMS,
e.g. Outside Air Temperature, Outside Air Relative Humidity, Supply Air Temperature, Return Air Temperature, damper positions, running or stopped status, etc. in order to allow the
operator to be informed of the status of the system and make changes to setpoints and schedules.
2. Graphic floor plans accurately depicting rooms, walls, hallways, and showing accurate locations of space sensors and major mechanical equipment.
3. Detailed graphics for each mechanical system.
4. Access corresponding system drawings, technical literature, and sequences of operations directly from each system graphic.
G.
The BMS shall provide the following data links to the following information for operator access
and use. This information shall be in PDF format and shall reside on the NAC
1. Project control as-built documentation; to include all BMS drawings and diagrams converted
to Adobe Acrobat .pdf files.
2. BMS Bill of Material for each system, e.g. Air Handler, Roof Top Unit, Boiler etc.
3. Technical literature specification data sheets for all components listed in the BMS Bill of Material.
4. Sequence of operation for all BMS provided systems.
H.
The BMS shall provide automated alarming software capable of sending messages via the owner’s
e-mail service or via text message to a cellular phone. The alarm system shall be able to segregate
users, time schedules, and equipment, and be capable of being programmed by the owner.
It is preferable that no third party software be required for commissioning or set up of device controllers. If a dedicated configuration tool is required for device controller configuration it must be
approved by the owner prior to implementation. If approved it should have the capability to be
launched from within the applicable Network Management Software. If the configuration tool(s)
cannot be launched from the Network Management Software, any software required for controller
configuration shall be included as a leave-behind tool with enough license capability to support
the installation.
The contractor shall provide the appropriate quantity of legal copies of all software tools, configuration tools, management tools, and utilities used during system commissioning and installation.
All tools shall be generally available in the market. No closed and/or unavailable tools will be permitted. Contractor shall convey all software tools and their legal licenses at project close out to the
owner. The Contractor is not responsible to provide licensed copies of NiagaraAX Workbench
Software and shall not bill the owner for the cost of such
I.
J.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 2
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
1.6
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating, Building Management System (BMS) utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as
described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only.
All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that
is required to meet the functional intent of this specification, shall be provided without additional
cost to the Owner.
The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s).
Scope: Contractor shall implement a Niagara based open system that will allow products from
various suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all
software associated with any and all incremental work on the project. Only NiagaraAX based
products from Distech, Vykon, Siemens (Talon), Schneider Electric (TAC), Honeywell (WEBS),
Johnson Controls (FX), or other Niagara AX based manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and operating Building Automation System
(BAS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein. Provide a Building Automation System (BAS) incorporating open & non-proprietary communication
technology at the controller level to establish a building-wide Building Management System
(BMS). The BAS shall consist of Direct Digital Control (DDC) controllers, Building Controllers,
Graphical User Interface through standard Web browsers, sensors, relays, valves, actuators, and
other equipment as may be necessary to provide for a complete and operational control system for
the HVAC and other building related systems as described within these specifications and / or
shown on contract drawings. All controllers furnished in this section shall communicate on a
peer-to-peer bus over a single BACnet open protocol bus.
1. The intent of this specification is to provide a system that is consistent with BMS systems
throughout the owner’s facilities running the Niagara AX™ Framework.
2. System architecture shall fully support a multi-vendor environment and be able to integrate
third party systems via existing vendor protocols including, as a minimum, LonTalk, BACnet,
and Modbus.
3. System architecture shall provide secure Web access using MS Internet Explorer from any
computer on the owner’s LAN.
4. All control devices furnished with this Section shall be programmable directly from the Niagara-AX™ Workbench upon completion of this project. The use of configurable or programmable controllers that require additional software tools for post-installation maintenance shall
not be acceptable.
5. Any control vendor that must provide additional BMS server software shall be unacceptable.
Only systems that utilize the WEBs Niagara AX™ Framework shall satisfy the requirements
of this section.
6. The Network Area Controller (NAC) BMS server shall host all graphic files for the control
system. All graphics and navigation schemes for this project shall match those that are on the
existing campus Niagara-AX Supervisory System installed on the Authority network. framework server
7. The Owner shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data files
and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job
specific software code, databases and documentation for all configuration and programming
that is generated for a given project and/or configured for use with the NAC, FMCS Server(s),
and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices. Any and
all required IDs and passwords for admin and programming level access to any component or
software program shall be provided to the Owner
8. It is the owner’s intent to purchase an open system capable of being serviced and expanded
by multiple Niagara supplier’s products. The Niagara Compatibility Statement (NICS) for all
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 3
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Niagara Software shall allow open access and be set as follows: Accept Station In = All; Accept Station Out = All; Accept Tool In = All; Accept Tool Out = All. In any case, the Owner
shall maintain the right to direct Tridium to modify any software license, regardless of supplier, as desired by the Owner.
All hardware installed for the project shall be constructed in a modular fashion to permit the
next generation and support components to be installed in replace of or in parallel with existing components.
Provide and install all wiring required for a complete system, including communication bus,
analog points, digital points, low voltage power, emergency power, and spare communication
bus. Splices are not permitted within the IAS FAC LAN or DLN communication cables. Only
continuous bus topologies, MS/TP or continuous homeruns are allowed for these networks. Capacity of any bus shall be limited to 80% of the allowable device count to allow
for future minor modifications or expansions to the network.
Provision of all documentation called out in these specifications including, but not limited to,
submittals, O&M manuals, commissioning submittals, CAD based as-built documentation,
and training manuals. Provide both hard copies and electronic files on electronic media.
Training of facility personnel, and or maintenance contractor, on the operation and maintenance of the system.
The repair of all finished surfaces effected as a result of IAS related installation work. This
includes but is not limited to carpet, drywall, paint, ceiling tiles, furniture, and the like.
System point to point check out, verification and documentation. Assist the Owner/CxA,
and/or TAB Firm in verification and functional performance testing and GUI acceptance testing.
Graphical User Interface Development. The Contractor shall develop the graphics, tools, features, and network integration as required.
Except as otherwise noted, the control system shall consist of all Ethernet Network Controllers,
Standalone Digital Control Units, workstations, software, sensors, transducers, relays, valves,
dampers, damper operators, control panels, and other accessory equipment, along with a complete
system of electrical interlocking wiring to fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system. Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for equipment such as
dampers if the equipment manufacturer does not provide these. Coordinate requirements with the
various Contractors.
The intent of the project is to allow for open system architecture to provide a complete Direct Digital Control system for automatic temperature controls and Building Automation. All HVAC and
related equipment as specified shall be connected to one network, except as noted otherwise.
The BAS contractor shall review and study all HVAC drawings and the entire specification to familiarize himself with the equipment and system operation and to verify the quantities and types
of dampers, operators, alarms, etc. to be provided.
All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed
below shall be provided under this Contract. When the BAS system is fully installed and operational, the BAS Contractor and representatives of the Owner will review and check out the system.
At that time, the BAS contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it
complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete building automation system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in this specification. At a minimum, provide controls for the
following:
1. Boilers
2. Hot water pumps
3. Air handlers, including variable speed drive fans, outside air and return air dampers, supply
air temperature sensors, hot water valves, cooling and other components as required for the
sequence of operation and as indicated by the plans and these specifications.
4. VAV Terminals and VAV terminals with hot water reheat.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 4
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
1.7
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
5. Cabinet Heaters
6. Exhaust fans
7. Hot water cabinet heaters
8. Exhaust Fans
9. Radiant Heating System
10. Air Cooled Condensing Units
11. Automatic Temperature Control System
12. IT Room Ductless Split System
13. CO Detection System
14. NO2 Detection System
Provide 24VAC low voltage wiring to all VAV boxes within the building.
Provide interlock wiring and control devices for interconnected systems.
Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of system in coordination with the
Commissioning Agent, HVAC Contractor, Balancing Contractor and Owner’s representative.
All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all codes, laws and
governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, the
Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the
specification will govern. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses.
The documentation contained in this section and other contract documents pertaining to HVAC
Controls is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and software necessary to
implement the functions shown or as implied in the contract documents.
OPEN SYSTEMS DESIGN
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
It is the owners express goal to implement an open Building Automaton System that will allow
products from various suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system The BAS provided shall maintain open
interoperability in the following areas.
Communications - The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, standalone, distributed control system with the capability to integrate ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 1352001 BACnet, MODBUS, OPC, and other open and proprietary communication protocols in one
open, interoperable system.
Network Management - Network management tools shall be based upon Niagara-AX technology.
All tools and hardware provided shall comply with the current release version of the Niagara-AX
platform. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry
standards including ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet to assure interoperability
between all system components is required. For each BACnet device, the device supplier must
provide a PICS document showing the installed device’s compliance level. Minimum compliance
is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of
BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet (BACnet Ethernet/IP,) and/or RS-485 (BACnet MSTP) as
specified.
All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not
be acceptable. All available points in components and controllers which are required for BMS systems operation must be discoverable, whether or not they are included in the current system logic.
Network Architecture - A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response
times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.
1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the
point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 5
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
2.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
1.8
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the
point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces.
User Access - The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard
Web Browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable. An Open
DataBase Connectivity (ODBCU) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database
is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed
server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs
shall not be acceptable.
Databases - All controller program graphics and network databases shall be provided in a NiagaraAX Tridium format. The database shall be stored on the owner PC and provide on a separate CD
upon final acceptance of the project. An updated database shall be provided on a CD at the end of
the warranty period.
Network Level Devices - All network level devices (devices that provide for communication interface between the LON/BACnet and the Ethernet) shall conform to the current released version.
Software Tools - All software tools needed for full functional use, including programming of controllers, network management and expansion, and graphical user interface use and development, of
the BAS described within these specifications shall be provided to the owner or his designated
agent. Any licensing required by the manufacturer now and into the future, including changes to
the licensee of the software tools and the addition of hardware corresponding to the licenses, to
allow for a complete and operational system for both normal day to day operation and servicing
shall be provided. Any such changes to the designated license holders shall be made by the manufacturer upon written request by the owner or his agent. Any cost associated with the license
changes shall be identified within the BAS submittals.
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT – All Software licenses for access and control of the BAS
are to be provided to the Owner. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application software to Owner as defined by the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect manufacturer's rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software. The Owner shall be the
named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s). In addition, the Owner shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code, databases and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and/or configured for use with the BCUU, BAS
Server(s), and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices.
Any and all required IDs and passwords for access to any component or software program shall be
provided to the owner. The System Integrator shall provide as part of the submittals a copy of the
Compatibility Statement verifying that all aspect of the Framework maintain an Open System Design.
Training - Manufacturer shall provide training on the use and operation of all products provided
within these specifications to Owner or his designated agent. Owner Training shall consist of (2) 8
hour training sessions. A manufacturer certified instructor shall give all training classes. A list of
additional training courses and the associated cost shall be provided as part of the BAS submittals.
1. Training Manuals - Include the following in training manuals.
a. Manufacturer’s training brochures.
b. Operation and maintenance manuals.
c. Completed Field Acceptance Test Procedure.
d. “As-installed” Drawings.
e. Manufacturer’s Operation Manuals.
f. Software interaction sheets to be used in instructing students how to use the control system, on a command-by-command basis.
WORK BY OTHERS
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 6
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.9
The Electrical Contractor shall:
1. Provide power wiring to motors and junction boxes for power to BAS panels.
2. Furnish smoke detectors and wire to the building fire alarm system. HVAC Contractor shall
mount devices. BAS Contractor shall hardwire to fan shut down.
3. Provide auxiliary contact (pulse initiator) on the electric meter for central monitoring of kWH
and KW. Electrical Contractor shall provide the pulse rate for remote readout to the BAS.
BAS contractor shall coordinate this with the electrical contractor.
CODE COMPLIANCE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.10
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
The BAS Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors performing work on this project necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. To that end, each contractor shall consult the
drawings and specifications for all trades to determine the nature and extent of others’ work.
The BAS Contractor shall furnish all control valves, sensor wells, flow meters and other similar
equipment for installation by the Mechanical Contractor.
The BAS Contractor shall provide field supervision to the designated contractor for the installation
of the following:
1. Automatic control dampers
2. Fire/smoke dampers
3. Blank-off plates for dampers that are smaller than duct size.
Provide BAS components and ancillary equipment, which are UL-916 listed and labeled.
All equipment or piping used in conditioned air streams, spaces or return air plenums shall comply
with NFPA 90A Flame/Smoke/Fuel contribution rating of 25/50/0 and all applicable building
codes or requirements.
All wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code.
All smoke dampers shall be rated in accordance with UL 555S.
Comply with FCC rules, Part 15 regarding Class A radiation for computing devices and low
power communication equipment operating in commercial environments.
Comply with FCC, Part 68 rules for telephone modems and data sets.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Procedure: Comply with submittal requirements indicated below and as stipulated in 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
Product Data General: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications, application instructions, product storage and handling requirements, and similar data for each product
specified below as required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and provide
complete application information.
1. Product Data: Provide information for each type of product specified.
Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work to describe the work.
1. Manufacturer to propose spacing and layout of supporting devices including heights, spacing,
and frequency.
2. All shop drawings shall be prepared in Visio Professional or AutoCAD software. In addition
to the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish a flash drive containing the identical information.
Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and workstations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of
each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference to their associated controller. Typicals will be allowed where appropriate.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 7
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
D.
E.
F.
G.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3. Submittal data shall contain manufacturer's data on all hardware and software products required by the specification. Valve, damper and air flow station schedules shall indicate size,
configuration, capacity and location of all equipment.
4. Software submittals shall contain narrative descriptions of sequences of operation, program
listings, point lists, and a complete description of the graphics, reports, alarms and configuration to be furnished with the workstation software. Information shall be bound or in a three
ring binder with an index and tabs. A complete points list to be provided in the format indicated in the attached Appendix A. Appendix A lists minimum addressable points; additional
points will be required to address the proposed sequence of operation.
5. Submit six (6) copies of submittal data and shop drawings to the Engineer for review prior to
ordering or fabrication of the equipment. The Contractor prior to submitting shall check all
documents for accuracy.
6. The Engineer will make corrections, if required, and return to the Contractor. The Contractor
will then resubmit with the corrected or additional data. This procedure shall be repeated until all corrections are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the submittals are fully approved.
7. Submittal Reference Data Requirements:
a. Qualifications: Manufacturer, Installer, and Key personnel qualifications as indicated for
the appropriate items.
b. Submit a list of no less than three (3) similar projects, which utilize the NiagaraAX
Framework for Enterprise connectivity to provide a Building Management System that
consists of web-browser control and monitoring of the proposed BACnet, field level devices. These projects must be on-line and functional such that representatives from the
Owner can observe the Building Management System and Interface in full operation. Include proper references and contact numbers of these reference projects.
c. Submit validation which indicates the successful completion of the Tridium NiagaraAX
certification course by installing staff.
d. Submit resumes of installing staff indicating passing certificates for training on the BACnet line of controls to be installed as part of this project.
e. Submit documentation indicating BACnet Testing Labs compliance and include Protocol
Implementation Conformance (PIC) Statements
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
Maintenance data.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with the applicable sections noted in DIVISION 01, including but limited to the following:
1. Requirements of 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
2. Submission of maintenance instructions described in 017823 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA;
3. Record documents as described in 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS;
4. Demonstration and training requirements indicated in 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
5. Provide as-built documentation including all items listed in Submittals paragraph, above.
6. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control
units, thermostats, and sensors.
a. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.
b. Submit data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record Documents" form.
7. Operation and Maintenance Data:
a. Submit interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified
and numbered system components and devices.
b. Submit keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator
function.
c. Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 8
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
1.11
SYSTEM STARTUP & COMMISSIONING
A.
B.
C.
1.12
TRAINING
A.
1.13
Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality. In addition,
each mechanical and electrical system under control of the BAS will be tested against the appropriate sequence of operation specified herein. Successful completion of the system test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report will be submitted to the owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance with the plans and specifications.
The BAS contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all major equipment and systems, such as the chilled water, hot water and all air handling systems, in the presence of the
equipment manufacturer’s representatives, as applicable, the Commissioning Agent and the Owner
and Architect’s representatives.
The BAS Contractor shall provide all manpower and engineering services required to assist the
HVAC Contractor and Balancing Contractor in testing, adjusting, and balancing all systems in the
building. The BAS Contractor shall have a trained technician available on request during the balancing of the systems. The BAS Contractor shall coordinate all requirements to provide a complete air balance with the Balancing Contractor and shall include all labor and materials in his contract.
Refer to specification 23 08 00 “Start-up and Commissioning” and 017900 Demonstration and
Training for controls training requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
General - The HVAC Control System shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by a licensed
Controls Contractor or System Integrator (SI). All work provided under this section shall be provided by direct employees of the SI or under the direct supervision of the SI personnel.
System Integrator Qualifications
1. Installer's Qualifications: The Contractor shall have a successful history in the design and
installation of NiagaraAX based Building Management Systems to provide web browser monitoring and control of BACnet field level devices. Contractor must demonstrate experience in
BMS installations for not less than 5 years and in Direct Digital Control installation projects
with point counts equal to this Project and systems of the same character as this Project.
2. Installer's Experience with Proposed Product Line: Firms shall have specialized in and be
experienced with the installation of the proposed product line for not less than one year from
date of final completion on at least three (3) projects of similar size and complexity. Submittals shall document this experience with references. Provide evidence of completion of NiagaraAX Technical Certification Program as part of the submittal process.
3. The SI must be regularly engaged in the service and installation of Niagara-AX Commercial
Building System based systems as specified herein, The SI shall have a minimum of 5 years
experience in the sales, installation, engineering, programming servicing and commissioning
of BAS
4. The system integrator must be an authorized factory direct representative in good standing of
the manufacturer of the proposed hardware and software components.
5. The SI shall have an office within 50 miles of the Building site that is staffed with a minimum
of 2 technicians who have successfully completed the factory authorized training of the proposed manufactures hardware and software components and have successfully completed a
Niagara-AX Tridium approved course. SI must provide proof of required training. The SI capabilities shall include engineering and design of control systems, programming, electrical
installation of control systems, troubling shooting and service.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 9
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
6.
C.
1.14
B.
B.
The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s). In addition, the Owner shall receive ownership of all job specific licenses, configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the
project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project or configured for use with the
NAC, and any related LAN / WAN Intranet connected and devices. Any and all required IDs and
passwords for access to any component or software program shall be provided to the owner. The
BMS Vendor shall provide a statement, signed by a principal of the BMS vendor firm, affirming
that all user ID’s and passwords created during the installation process and necessary for access to
any component or software program have been provided to the owner.
The owner, or his appointed agent, shall receive ownership of all job specific software configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall
include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and /or configured for use within NiagaraAX
Framework (Niagara) based controllers and/or servers and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and
all connected routers and devices.
WORK BY OTHERS
A.
B.
1.17
The operation and maintenance manuals shall contain all information necessary for the operation,
maintenance, replacement, installation, and parts procurement for the entire BAS. This documentation shall include specific part numbers and software versions and dates. A complete list of recommended spare parts shall be included with the lead time and expected frequency of use of each
part clearly identified.
Following project completion and testing, the BAS contractor will submit as-built drawings reflecting the exact installation of the system. The as-built documentation shall also include a copy
of all application software both in written form and on diskette.
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
A.
1.16
Hardware and Software Component Manufacturer Qualifications
1. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components must be primarily engaged in the
manufacture of BACnet based systems as specified herein, and must have been so for a minimum of five (5) years.
2. The manufacturer of the hardware and software components shall have a technical support
group accessible via a toll free number that is staffed with qualified personnel, capable of
providing instruction and technical support service for networked control systems.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
1.15
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
System Integrators of the hardware and software components as specified herein will be direct
employees of the BCUS supplier and shall be certified as possessing superior working
knowledge related to DDC System Integration for BCUS installed for this project.
The BMS Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors performing work on this project necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. To that end, each contractor shall consult the
drawings and specifications for all trades to determine the nature and extent of others’ work.
The Electrical Contractor shall:
1. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall be powered via a dedicated circuit from the UPS
distribution panel.
WARRANTY
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 10
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
A.
B.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
The BAS contractor shall warrant the system for 12 months after system acceptance and beneficial
use by the owner. During the warranty period, the BAS contractor shall be responsible for all necessary revisions to the software as required to provide a complete and workable system consistent
with the letter and intent of the Sequence of Operation section of the specification.
Updates to the manufacturer’s software shall be provided at no charge during the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.3
The BMS shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, graphical user interface software, network devices, valves, dampers, sensors, and other devices as specified herein.
The Contractor shall not be responsible for providing software or configuration services for the
System Supervisor. The Contractor shall utilize their own configuration software in order to bring
the system to a fully operational standalone condition, ready for access by the Supervisory system.
Contractor shall implement a NiagaraAX based open system that will allow products from various
suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion,
maintenance, and service of the system. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project. Only NiagaraAX based products from Distech, Vykon, Siemens (Talon), Schneider Electric (TAC), Honeywell (WEBS), Johnson Controls (FX), or other NiagaraAX based manufacturers are acceptable.
It is the owner’s intent to purchase an open system capable of being serviced and expanded by
multiple Niagara suppliers’ products. The Niagara Compatibility Statement (NICS) for all Niagara
Software shall allow open access and be set as follows: Accept Station In = *; Accept Station Out
= *; Accept Tool In = *; Accept Tool Out = *. In any case, the Owner shall maintain the right to
direct Tridium to modify any software license, regardless of supplier, as desired by the Owner.
CONTROLS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
All controllers shall be capable of being linked through a new Niagara-AX Tridium Building System or approved equal, to establish a building-wide Building Management System (BMS).
All controllers shall be capable of being linked through a new Honeywell WEBs-AX™ system or
approved equal, to establish a building-wide Building Management System (BMS).
All controls and equipment shall communicate BACnet® protocol.
The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of
control strategies at other operational devices.
Each unit shall be provided with a microprocessor based control system. The unit control system
shall include all required temperature and pressure sensors, input/output modules, unitary controllers, main microprocessor and operator interface. All boards shall be individually replaceable for
ease of service. All microprocessors, boards, and sensors shall be mounted, wired and tested.
The unit control system shall perform all unit control functions including scheduling, constant volume discharge temperature control with morning warm up heat with unit diagnostics and safeties.
The microprocessor shall be a stand-alone DDC controller not dependent on communications with
any on-site or remote PC or master control panel. The microprocessor shall maintain existing set
points and operate stand-alone if the unit loses either direct connect or network communications.
The microprocessor memory shall be protected from voltage fluctuations as well as any extended
power failures. All factory and user set schedules and control points shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory. No settings shall be lost, even during extended power shutdowns.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 11
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Q.
2.4
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
The main microprocessor shall support an RS-232 direct connection to a product service tool or a
modem.
All digital inputs and outputs shall be protected against damage from transients or wrong voltages.
Each digital input and digital output shall be equipped with an LED for ease of service. All field
wiring shall be terminated at a separate, clearly marked terminal strip.
The microprocessor memory shall be protected from all voltage fluctuations as well as any extended power failures.
The BAS shall consist of the following:
1. Excel 15 Building Manager
2. Standalone Application Specific Controllers (Application Specific Controllers)
3. Operator's desk top computer workstation.
The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, Application Specific Controllers, and operator devices.
The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of
control strategies at other operational devices.
The Building Management System shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, and historical data collection and archiving.
The Building Management System shall consist of the following:
1. Standalone DDC panels
2. Application specific controllers (HVAC etc.)
3. Local Display Device capability
4. Portable Operator's Terminal capability
5. Personal Computer Operator Workstations
6. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone DDC panels, and operator devices.
System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting
and control execution. Each DDC panel shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O, and historical data collection. The failure of any
single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at
other operational devices.
Standalone DDC panels shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands and
alarm reports directly to any other DDC panel or combination of panels on the network without
dependence upon a central processing device, such as a central file server. Standalone DDC panels shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations, terminals, and printers without dependence upon a central processing device or File Server.
NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS
A.
Network Access to be limited as follows:
1. The Contractor will not be provided with remote access to the NAC. The Contractor will perform all tasks required to bring the system to a standalone, fully functional condition by utilizing a direct connection to the NAC.
2. A port will be provided adjacent to the NAC for connection to the Authority WAN.
3. Authority Employees will access the NAC via the Authority Network. Authority ITS Department will administer all user access to the Authority Network.
B.
Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a
local network, auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or a combination of the two networking schemes.
Local Network:
C.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 12
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
E.
2.5
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Personal Computer/Panel Support: The Personal Computer and Building Manager panel shall
directly oversee a local network such that communications may be executed directly to and
between Application Specific Controllers. The Excel Building Manager shall be referred to as
the "Digital Panel(s)" throughout this document.
Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems,
shall have the ability to access all point status and application report data on the network. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system.
Global Data Sharing: Global Data Sharing or global point broadcasting shall allow point data
to be shared between Application Specific Controllers, when it would be inefficient or impractical to locate multiple sensors. .
General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions:
a. Support of any combination of Application Specific Controllers. A minimum of 100 Application Specific Controllers shall be supported on a single local network.
b. Detection of single or multiple failures of Application Specific Controllers or the network
media.
c. Error detection, correction, and retransmission to guarantee data integrity.
d. Commonly available, multiple-sourced, networking components shall be used.
e. Use of an industry standard protocol communications interface.
Dial-up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow Digital Panels to communicate with remote operator terminals on an occasional basis via telephone
lines.
Dial-up Digital Panels: Auto-Dial Digital Panels shall automatically place calls to remote terminals to report critical alarms.
1. Digital Panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the initiation of calls. Noncritical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests an upload of all alarms.
2. The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no-answers", and
incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when communications cannot be
established with primary devices.
F.
Dial-up Remote Operator Terminals: Operators at dial-up remote operator terminals shall be able
to perform all control functions, all report functions, and all data base generation and modification
functions as described for local operator terminals connected via the RS-232 port. Routines shall
be provided to automatically answer calls, and display information sent from remote Digital Panels. The fact that communication is taking place with remote control systems over telephone lines
shall be completely transparent to an operator.
1. An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selecting any facility by its logical
name or associated telephone numbers.
2. Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with local network activity, nor shall local network activity keep the remote operator's terminal from handling incoming calls.
3. Both local and remote operators shall be able to access and perform functions with the Digital
Panel simultaneously.
G.
Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a
local area network, or auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or via a combination of the
two networking schemes.
NETWORK DEVICES
A.
These various devices can service multiple functions on the network depending on network design, communication medium and needed task. These functions include: management of traffic on
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 13
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
B.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
the network, reconfiguring and strengthening of signals, the conversion of protocols, global activities such as alarms, trends and scheduling, control logic, and protocol conversion and web page
hosting.
The Contractor shall supply one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC) as part of this contract.
Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and quantity of devices provided.
Multiple NAC’s shall not be used unless the number of required points exceeds the capacity of a
single NAC with all additional IO modules. The NAC shall provide the interface between the
LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over
the control devices connected to the NAC.
1. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide:
a. Calendar functions
b. Scheduling
c. Trending
d. Alarm monitoring and routing
e. Time synchronization
f. Integration of BACnet MS/TP and BACnet IP controllers as well as their BACnet objects
2. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall be powered via a dedicated circuit from the UPS
distribution panel.
3. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the following hardware features as a minimum:
a. Basis of Design: Vykon JACE 700
(1) Platform and Operating System
667 MHz 440Epx Power PC processor
i.
ii. QNX OS version 6.3.2 with IBM J9 Virtual Machine version 2.3
iii. Requires NiagaraAX Release 3.5 or higher.
iv. Base unit – 512 MB DDR-2 333 MHz RAM.
v. One GB NAND flash memory on board for database storage, trend storage and
system software
vi. Two 1 Gigabit Ethernet ports
vii. Two USB 2.0 ports (for future application use)
viii. One RS-232 and one isolated RS-485 ports
ix. Internal battery backup to allow system database save after power failure, plus
maintenance of Real-time clock for up to one year.
x. Two JACE communication slots for optional JACE communication interface
card
(2) Power Input
i. Uses WPM wall modules or NPB-PWR-UN universal power supply module
Power required is 15 volts DC at 20 watts Max
(3) Chassis
i. Housed in molded plastic enclosure
ii. Cooling: Internal air convection
iii. Dimensions (approx): 8 1/2” wide X 6” high X 2 5/8” tall (215.9 mm wide X
152.4 mm high X 68.3 mm tall)
iv. Panel mounting via screws or standard Din rail.
v. Weight: Net 4 lbs. (1.814 kg), Gross 5 lbs. (2.268 kg)
(4) Environment
i. 0 – 50° C, 32 - 122° F; 0-90% RH, non-condensing (for electronics)
(5) Agency Listings
i.
UL 916
ii. C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
iii. C22.2 No. 205-M1983 “Signal Equipment”
iv. CE
v. FCC part 15 Class A.
vi. RoHS compliant
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 14
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
vii. BTL B-BC listed when optional BACnet driver is used
(6) IO-16-485 Remote IO modules
i. 16 IO Points per device
ii. 8 Universal Inputs - Type 3 (10k) Thermistors, 0-100K ohm,0-10 vdc, 0-20
mA with external resistor
iii. 4 relay outputs (Form A contacts, 24 VAC @ .5 amp rated)
iv. 4 analog outputs (0-10 vdc)
v. Up to 16 remote IO-16-485 modules max per JACE-700
vi. Power Options
vii. Direct connect (Pin compatible) with the NPB-PWR & NPB-PWR-UN power
supplies.
viii. Modules can be powered directly from select JACE models with 15VDC outputs.
ix. External 15 VDC power supply
x. DIN rail or surface mounting
The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A
database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an
ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet or a direct Ethernet cable connection.
Event Alarm Notification and actions
a. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to
supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.
b. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether
connected to a local network, or remote via dial-up telephone connection or wide-area
network.
c. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including, but not limited to:
(1) In alarm
(2) Return to normal
(3) Fault condition
d. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight alarm classes for the purpose of routing
types and/or classes of alarms, e.g.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
e. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
f. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and/or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control.
Controller and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.
Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:
a. Screen message text
(1) Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients via the owner’s e-mail
service. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on:
(2) Day of week
(3) Time of day
(4) Recipient
b. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message via the
owner’s e-mail service
c. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s)
d. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer
The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum):
a. Time and date
b. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
c. Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.)
d. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 15
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
e. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose.
Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or
classes of alarms defined by the user.
A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user.
Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided
and available for review by the user.
An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available
for review by the user
The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBCU or SQL.
A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBCU-compliant database or must provide an
ODBCU data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
The Building Controller (BCUU) The NAC will provide all scheduling, alarming, trending,
and network management for the all BACnet devices.
Provide multiple Building Controllers as necessary. No more than 90% of the available resources of the NAC shall be committed.
The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support
a minimum of 16 simultaneous users.
Event Alarm Notification and actions - The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage;
routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up, telephone connection, or wide-area network.
a. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to:
(1) To alarm
(2) Return to normal
(3) To fault
b. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing
types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc
c. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node.
d. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as
alarms and annunciated.
e. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:
(1) Screen message text
(2) Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to
route and email alarms based on:
i. Day of week
ii. Time of day
iii. Recipient
(3) Graphic with flashing alarm object(s)
(4) Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer
f. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum):
(1) Time and date
(2) Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
(3) Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.)
(4) Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.
(5) Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 16
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
g. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that
purpose.
h. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or
classes of alarms defined by the user.
i. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the
system) and shall be available for review by the user.
j. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.
k. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user.
l. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and
available for review by the user.
21. Data Collection and Storage - The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any property
of any object and store this data for future use.
a. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall
have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:
(1) Designating the log as interval or deviation.
(2) For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the
sample collection interval.
(3) For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a
fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object.
(4) For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log
and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a
first-in, first-out basis.
(5) Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a
user-defined event or action.
b. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC and the data shall be accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser. All log
data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard
SQL statements. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:
(1) HTML
(2) XML
(3) Plain Text
(4) Comma or tab separated values
(5) PDF
c. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall not
be acceptable.
d. The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely
to a server or other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following
archiving properties, at a minimum:
(1) Archive when log has reached its user-defined capacity of data stores
(2) Archive on time of day
(3) Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size)
(4) Provide ability to clear logs once archived
e. Audit Log - Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the
NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log
based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server.
For each log entry, provide the following data:
(1) Time and date
(2) User ID
(3) Change or activity: i.e., Change set point, add or delete objects, commands, etc.
22. Database Backup and Storage - The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its
database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval. Copies of
the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the NAC. The
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 17
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined database save interval. The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is
supported.
2.6
C.
Provide NAC Building Control Unit (BCUU) to provide the performance specified in section 1 of
this division. Each of these panels shall meet the following requirements.
1. The Building Automation System shall be composed of one or more independent, standalone,
microprocessor based Network Area Building Controllers to manage the global strategies described in System software section.
2. The NAC Building Controller shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system,
database, and programming requirements.
3. The controller shall provide a communications port for connection of the Portable Operators
Terminal.
4. The operating system of the Controller shall manage the input and output communications
signals to allow distributed Unit controllers to share real and virtual point information and
allow central monitoring and alarms.
5. Controllers that perform scheduling shall have a real time clock.
6. Heating Hot Water (HWS) temperature set point control with Outdoor Temperature Reset
based on ramp function between HWS set point and ambient conditions.
7. Data shall be shared between networked Unit Building Controllers.
8. The Building Controller shall utilize industry recognized open standard protocols for communication to unit controllers.
9. The Building Controller shall continually check the status of its processor and memory circuits. If an abnormal operation is detected, the controller shall:
a. Assume a predetermined failure mode.
b. Generate an alarm notification.
c. Create a retrievable file of the state of all applicable memory locations at the time of the
failure.
d. Automatically reset the Building Controller to return to a normal operating mode.
D.
Server Functions and Hardware - A central server, located at NJTA Head Quarters shall be provided by the Owner.
DIGITAL PANELS
A.
B.
C.
General: Digital Panels shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, digital control
processors.
Memory: Each Digital Panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system
and data bases including:
1. Control processes
2. Energy Management Applications
3. Alarm Management
4. Trend Data
5. Maintenance Support Applications
6. Operator I/O
7. Dial-Up Communications
8. Manual Override Monitoring
Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through
the addition of field controllers, sensors, and actuators.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 18
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.7
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Serial Communication Parts: Digital Panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices, such as laptop computers, Personal Computers, and Video Display terminals.
Hardware Override Monitoring: Digital Panels shall monitor the status of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has
been inhibited.
Integrated On-Line Diagnostics: Each Digital Panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,
communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. Digital Panels shall provide
both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each Digital
Panel.
Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as
all field point terminations, to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard
587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the
same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code.
Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of
the Digital Panel to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Flash based nonvolatile memory for storage of database. Upon restoration of normal power, the Digital Panel
shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.
Minimum Panel Configuration
1. PC workstation can be connected via Ethernet, dial-up, or direct connection.
2. Three (3) configurable RS-232 ports.
3. Lon compatible scheduling.
4. UL listed for energy management (UL 916).
5. Online-offline data base generation.
6. Flexible alarm routing.
7. Power-fail restart, built-in.
8. Supports the Internet Protocol (IP) implementation defined in Annex J of the ASHRAE standard.
STANDALONE DDC PANELS
A.
B.
General: Standalone DDC panels shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, realtime digital control processors. Each standalone DDC panel shall consist of modular hardware
with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies, and input/output
modules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of
this specification and the attached point list.
Memory: Each DDC panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and
databases including:
1. Control processes
2. Energy Management Applications
3. Alarm Management
4. Historical/Trend Data for all points
5. Maintenance Support Applications
6. Custom Processes
7. Operator I/O
8. Dial-Up Communications
9. Manual Override Monitoring
10. Point types: Each DDC panel shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
11. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts
12. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control
13. Analog Inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements
14. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of primary equipment
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 19
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
15. Pulse Inputs for pulsed contact monitoring
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
2.8
Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through
the addition of software applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors, and actuators.
The system architecture shall support 25% expansion capacity of all types of DDC panels, and all
point types included in the initial installation.
Serial Communication Ports: Standalone DDC panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial
data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, laptop workstations, PC workstations, and panel mounted or portable
DDC panel Operator's Terminals. Standalone DDC panels shall allow temporary use of portable
devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers, or
network terminals.
Hardware Override Switches: As indicated in the point schedule, the operator shall have the ability
to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC panel via local, point
discrete, onboard hand/off/auto operator override switches for binary control points and gradual
switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall be operable whether the
panel is powered or not.
Hardware Override Monitoring: DDC panels shall monitor the status or position of all overrides,
and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control
has been inhibited. DDC panels shall also collect override activity information for daily and
monthly reports.
Local Status Indicator Lamps: The DDC panel shall provide local status indication for each binary input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need
for an operator I/O device.
Integrated On-Line Diagnostics: Each DDC panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics,
communication diagnosis and diagnosis of subsidiary equipment. The DDC panel shall provide
both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each DDC panel,
and shall not require the connection of an operator I/O device.
Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as
all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard
587-1980.
Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of
all standalone DDC panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72
hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.
Should DDC panel memory be lost for any reason, the panel will automatically receive a download via the local area network, phone lines, or connected computer. In addition, the user shall
have the capability of reloading the DDC panel via the local area network, via the local RS-232C
port, or via telephone line dial-in.
FREE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER (FPC)
A.
B.
A controller designed for more complex sequences of operations such as built up AHU’s, central
plant operations, electrical monitoring, and control and management for chillers, boilers and generators. The FPCs are to allow for the flexibility of custom control programming to meet the
needed sequences of operation.
Performance – Each FPC shall have a minimum of 64K of Non-volatile Flash memory for control
applications and 128K non-volatile flash memory for storage with an 8 bit processor at 10mhz.
The FPC shall have a minimum ambient operating temperature range of -0oC to 70oC or 32oF to
158oF.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 20
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
C.
D.
2.9
APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC)
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.10
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Inputs – Analog inputs shall have the following minimum level of performance: 16 bit A to D resolution; allow monitoring of platinum 100 ohms, platinum 1000 ohm, thermistor 10K type II, thermistor 10K type III, voltage input 0-10V, current input 4-20mA, digital input, pulsed input minimum 2 Hz.
Output – All out puts shall be software configurable to be either analog or digital - Analog outputs
shall have a Voltage of 0-10 VDC (linear) and Digital outputs shall be 0-12 VDC (off/on) and
PWM. Outputs shall have an adjustable range of 2 seconds to 15 minutes All outputs shall an auto
reset fuse. Output Resolution shall be a minimum 8 bits digital / analog converter. All individual
outputs and power supply shall be protected by an auto reset fuse. There shall be an LED status
indicator on each of the outputs.
A controller designed through its I/O configuration and configurable control logic to be used for a
specific type mechanical equipment. Typical applications are VAV boxes, Fan Coil Units, Packaged HVAC Units, Unit Ventilators, Split DX Systems, Heat Pumps etc.
Performance: Inputs Provide software selectable universal inputs. Analog inputs - shall have the
following minimum level of performance: 12 bit A to D resolution; manage thermistors with an
accuracy of: ±0.5oC; ±0.9oF, and a Potentiometer. For VAV Applications provide a differential
pressure input sensor built in to the controller with a 16 bit A to D resolution an adjustable range
of 0” to 1” H20 (0-248.8 Pa) static pressure with a minimum accuracy of ±3%. Minimum response
time shall be 0.5 seconds from input to output time.
Output – Analog outputs shall have the following minimum level of performance: Tri-mode Voltage of 0-10 VDC (linear), digital 0-12 VDC (off/on) or PWM. All analog outputs shall be
equipped with an auto reset fuse. Output Resolution shall be a minimum 8 bits digital / analog
converter. Digital outputs shall be provided with a minimum of a triac output rated at 24VAC and
1 amp. All analog outputs shall be fuse protected
ASC Features:
1. The ASC except for the VAV shall be provided with an optimum start program internal to its
control logic.
2. The ASC shall allow the use of its spare I/O as dumb I/O to be shared over the network to
other controllers such as FPC or the Building Controller (BCU), where a sequence of operation can be applied to the I/O. Such applications shall include but not be limited to exhaust fan
control, heaters, light control, etc.
3. Enclosures – Provide for all ASC except for the VAV, a plastic enclosure with a separate back
plate with terminals such that the electronic portion of the controller can be easily removed
for ease of installation and servicing.
CONTROLLER SOFTWARE FEATURES
A.
General:
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating control system, as described in this specification, shall be provided.
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the
Digital Panel, and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
B.
Control Software Description:
1. Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the
number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
2. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive
start commands to heavy electrical loads.
C.
Energy Management Applications: Digital Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of
the following energy management routines:
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 21
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
E.
F.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Time of Day Scheduling
Calendar Based Scheduling
Holiday Scheduling
Optimal Start
Optimal Stop
Demand Limiting
Load Rolling
Heating/Cooling Interlock
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall
be flexible enough to allow user customization.
Programming Capability: Digital Panels shall be able to execute configured processes defined by
the user to automatically perform calculations and control routines.
1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a configured
process:
a. Any system-measured point data or status
b. Any calculated data
c. Any results from other processes
d. Boolean logic operators (and, or)
2. Process Triggers: Configured processes may be triggered based on any combination of the
following:
a. Time of day
b. Calendar Date
c. Other processes
d. Events (e.g., point alarms)
3. Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from
any and all other Application Specific Controllers. In addition, a single process shall be able
to issue commands to points in any and all other Application Specific Controllers on the local
network.
Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm
reports to operator devices and memory files. Each Digital Panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms,
minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the Digital Panel's
ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at the local I/O device, or communications with other Application Specific Controllers on the network.
1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the points'
English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
2. Prioritizing: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to
critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Users shall have the
ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able to define
conditions under which point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or logged
for analysis at a later date.
3. Report Routing: Alarm reports and messages shall be directed to an operator device.
4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be
able to print, display or store a 60-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm
condition or direct operator response. Each Digital Panel shall be capable of storing a library
of at least 100 Alarm Messages. Each message must be capable of being assigned to any
number of points in the panel.
5. Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a
call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by timestamping and saving reports until a manual request is received, or until the buffer space is full.
The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 22
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
G.
H.
2.11
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Trend Analysis: A data collection utility shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data. Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 24 hours, in one-minute or one-hour intervals, shall
be provided. Each Digital Panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable
of storing 16 trend logs. Each trend log shall have up to four points trended at 48 data samples
each. Data shall be sorted at the Digital Panel, and uploaded to floppy disk storage when archival
is desired.
Runtime Totalization: Digital Panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours for
binary input and output points specified in the "Execution" portion of this specification.
1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique,
user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
I.
Pulse Totalization: Digital Panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption
totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected analog and binary pulse input-type
points.
1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage accumulations of up to 9,999,999 units (e.g.
KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons, etc.).
2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute.
3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
4. The information available from the Pulse Totalization shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
a. Peak Demand, with date and time stamp
b. 24-hour Demand Log
c. Accumulated KWH for day
d. Sunday through Saturday KWH usage
e. Sunday through Saturday Demand KW
f. Demand KW annual history for past 12 periods
g. KWH annual history for past 12 periods
J.
Event Totalization: Digital Panels shall have the ability to count events, such as the number of
times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off.
1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of
9,999,999 events before reset.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
A.
General:
1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification
shall be provided.
2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the
DDC panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
3. The Contractor shall provide PSE&G with a permanent license for full use of all software,
and provide all pertinent access codes and other data as may be required to modify or upgrade
the system in the future.
B.
Control Software Description:
1. Pre-Tested Control Algorithms: The DDC panels shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:
a. Two Position Control
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 23
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
2.
3.
4.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
b. Proportional Control
c. Proportional plus Integral Control
d. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Control
e. Automatic Control Loop Tuning
Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the
number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive
start commands to heavy electrical loads.
Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze
the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn
equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation.
C.
Energy Management Applications:
1. DDC Panels shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management
routines:
a. Time of Day Scheduling
b. Calendar Based Scheduling
c. Holiday Scheduling
d. Temporary Schedule Overrides
e. Optimal Start
f. Optimal Stop
g. Night Setback Control
h. Enthalpy Switch Over (Economizer)
i. Peak Demand Limiting
j. Temperature Compensated Load Rolling
k. Fan Speed/CFM Control
l. Heating/Cooling Interlock
m. Cold Deck Reset
n. Hot Deck Reset
o. Hot Water Reset
p. Chilled Water Reset
q. Condenser Water Reset
r. Chiller Sequencing
2. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and
shall be flexible enough to allow operator customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment as described in the Execution portion of this specification.
D.
Custom Process Programming Capability: DDC panels shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the operator, to automatically perform calculations and special control
routines.
1. Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process:
a. Any system-measured point data or status
b. Any calculated data
c. Any results from other processes
d. User-Defined Constants
e. Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exponential, etc.)
f. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)
g. On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers
2. Process Triggers: Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:
a. Time interval
b. Time of day
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 24
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
3.
4.
5.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
c. Date
d. Other processes
e. Time programming
f. Events (e.g., point alarms)
Dynamic Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated
data from any and all other DDC panels on the local area network. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC panels on the local
area network.
Advisory/Message Generation: Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and
advisories to operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a
specified device, buffer the information in a follow-up file, or cause the execution of a dial-up
connection to a remote device such as a printer.
Custom Process Documentation: The custom control-programming feature shall be self-documenting. All interrelationships defined by this feature shall be documented via graphical
flowcharts and English language descriptors.
E.
Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm
reports to operator devices and memory files. Each DDC panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms,
minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC panel's
ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at a PC Workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other panels on the network.
1. Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's
English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.
2. Prioritization: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point.
Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to
critical alarms. A minimum of three priority levels shall be provided. Each DDC panel shall
automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up.
Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall
also be able to define under which conditions point changes need to be acknowledged by an
operator, and/or sent to follow-up files for retrieval and analysis at a later date.
3. Report Routing: Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user-defined list of
operator devices or PC disk files used for archiving alarm information. Alarms shall also be
automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device is found to be off-line.
4. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be
able to print, display or store a 65-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm
condition or direct operator response. Each standalone DDC panel shall be capable of storing
a library of at least 250 Alarm Messages. Each message may be assigned to any number of
points in the panel.
5. Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a
call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by timestamping and saving reports until an operator scheduled time, a manual request, or until the
buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms.
6. Transaction Logging: Operator commands and system events shall be automatically logged
to disk in Personal Computer industry standard database format. Operator commands initiated from Direct-connected workstations, dial-up workstations, and local DDC panel Network
Terminal devices shall all be logged to this transaction file. This data shall be available at the
Operator Workstation. A utility shall be provided to allow the user to search the transaction
file using standard database query techniques, including searching by dates, operator name,
data point name, etc. In addition, this transaction file shall be accessible with standard third
party database and spreadsheet packages.
F.
Historical Data and Trend Analysis: A variety of Historical data collection utilities shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the following ways:
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 25
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
1.
2.
3.
4.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Continuous Point Histories: Standalone DDC panels shall store Point History Files for all
analog and binary inputs and outputs. The Point History routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of all analog inputs at half-hour intervals. Samples for all points
shall be stored for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipment performance and all problem-related events for the past day. Point History Files for binary input
or output points and analog output points shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commands for each point.
Control Loop Performance Trends: Standalone DDC panels shall also provide high-resolution sampling capability in one-second increments for verification of control loop performance.
Extended Sample Period Trends: Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall also
be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 2 hours shall be
provided. Each standalone DDC panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall
be capable of storing a minimum of 5000 data samples.
Data Storage and Archiving: Trend data shall be stored at the Standalone DDC panels, and
uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either
user-defined interval, manual command, or when the trend buffers become full. All trend data
shall be available in disk file format compatible with Third Party personal computer applications.
G.
Runtime Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime
hours for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution portion of this specification.
1. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique,
user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
H.
Analog/Pulse Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall automatically sample, calculate and
store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected analog and binary
pulse input-type points.
1. Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to 99,999.9 units
(e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.).
2. The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
3. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
I.
Event Totalization: Standalone DDC panels shall have the ability to count events such as the
number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed
on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
1. The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of
9,999,999 events before reset.
2. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages
shall be generated when the limit is reached.
J.
Unitary Controllers:
1. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems to address specific applications described in the "Execution" portion of this specification, and for
future expansion:
a. Unit Vents (ASHRAE Cycle, I, II, III, or W)
b. Heat Pumps (Air-to-Air, Water-to-Air)
c. Packaged Rooftops
d. Fan Coils (Two-Pipe, Four-Pipe)
2. Unitary Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:
a. Economizer Switchover Inputs
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 26
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
K.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
(1) Dry bulb
(2) Outdoor Air Enthalpy
(3) Differential Temperature
(4) Binary Input from a separate controller
b. Economizer Outputs
(1) Integrated Analog with minimum position
(2) Binary output to enable self-contained economizer actuator
c. Heating and Cooling Outputs
(1) 1 to 3 Stages
(2) Analog Output with two-pipe logic
(3) Reversing valve logic for Heat Pumps
d. Fan Output
(1) On/Off Logic Control
Unitary controllers shall support the following library of control strategies to address the requirements of the sequences described in this specification, and for future expansion:
a. Daily Schedules
b. Comfort/Occupancy Mode
c. Economy Mode
(1) Standby Mode/Economizer Available
(2) Unoccupied/Economizer Not Available
(3) Shutdown
d. Lighting Logic Interlock to Economy Mode
e. Temporary Override Mode
(1) Temporary Comfort Mode (Occupancy-Based Control)
(2) Boost (Occupant Warmer/Cooler Control)
Occupancy-Based Economy/Comfort Mode Control: Each Unitary Controller shall have a
provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a manual
wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the Unitary Controller shall automatically select
either an Economy or Comfort mode.
Occupancy-Based Zone Lighting Control: Unitary Controllers shall provide an auxiliary binary output to serve as the interface to an associated lighting relay. Based upon the status of
either an occupancy sensing device or manual wall switch, the Unitary Controller shall provide a contact output to automatically turn on or off the lights. This accommodates occupant
requirements while reducing electrical consumption. Economy/Comfort (described in the previous section) and Lighting overrides shall be served by the same occupancy override input.
Temporary Override Modes:
a. Temporary Occupancy Mode: The Controller interface to the zone temperature sensor
shall allow for an optional momentary switch to change the mode of the controller from
economy to comfort and optionally interlock the room lights for a preset amount of time.
b. Boost Mode: the controller interface to the zone temperature sensor shall allow for an
optional momentary switch to override the controller's output to full heating or cooling.
This command shall be active for a preset amount of time, to anticipate a substantial
change in the room's load.
Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each Unitary Controller shall automatically and
continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature. This allows users to
quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum
of two samples per hour shall be stored.
Alarm Management: Each Unitary Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
Air Handling Unit (AHU) Controllers:
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 27
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.12
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of systems
to address current requirements as described in the "Execution" portion of this specification,
and for future expansion:
a. Air Handling Units > 15,000 CFM or < 50,000 CFM
(1) Mixed Air-Single Path
(2) Mixed Air-Dual Path
(3) 100% Single Path
(4) 100% Dual Path
AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the sequence of operation specified in the "Execution" portion of this specification.
Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: Each AHU Controller shall automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two
samples per hour shall be stored.
Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring
and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications.
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE
A.
B.
C.
A software tool that provides for the development and management of the end user’s Graphical
User Interface (GUI). Graphic standards will be provided to the Contractor for utilization into this
project. Primary point of access for the end user will be via web pages generated on the NAC. and
as the primary point of access to the BAS for the end user.
The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree
view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure
of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and
navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification.
Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features and
functions:
1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of generating or assembling objects from a GIF, or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall
not be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support
the use of scanned pictures.
2. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects,
hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens.
3. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be
accomplished in a graphical manner.
a. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard
entry from the operator.
b. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry
from the operator.
4. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object
and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.
5. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking the selected
object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text shall be required.
6. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password access:
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 28
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
a. Create, delete or modify control strategies.
b. Add/delete objects to the system.
c. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters.
d. Enable or disable control strategies.
e. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer.
f. Select points to be alarm-able and define the alarm state.
g. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of values automatically.
7. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall
provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML
format.
8. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each
operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels
for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access
for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All system security data
shall be stored in an encrypted format.
9. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.
10. Alarm Console
a. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window
will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of
the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or
disabled by the system administrator.
b. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supersede
all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed
by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed
by the operator shall not be acceptable.
2.13
USER INTERFACES (WEB BASED)
A.
Web Browser Clients – The primary means of access to the BAS for day to day operation from
any PC connected to the LAN without the need for any proprietary software…
1. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard
Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or
manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable.
2. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is
supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms
of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the
Building Automation System (BAS), shall not be acceptable.
3. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules,
calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of
interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted.
4. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 29
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
a. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication
and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.
b. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web
browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported
by the Web browser interface.
c. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web
page
d. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Building Controller (BCU), without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics
storage on each client are not acceptable.
e. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a
manual “refresh” of the Web page.
f. User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
(1) Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a
graphical manner.
i. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any
keyboard entry from the operator.
ii. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.
iii. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the
selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu.
No entry of text shall be required.
iv. View logs and charts
v. View and acknowledge alarms
g. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on
user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their
defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system
shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
h. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator
(URL) for the desired link.
2.14
LOCAL OPERATOR INTERFACE (VIA LAPTOP PLUG-IN)
A.
Basic Interface Description:
1. Operator shall be capable to interface with the Building Management System via the Authority Network or a direct connection to the NAC laptop connection.
2. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting and English language point identification.
3. Text-Based Display: The Operator interface shall provide consistent text-based displays of all
system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all
operator devices.
4. Password Protection: Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the
user/manager to limit control, display, and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems
appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password.
a. Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices.
b. A minimum of three levels of access shall be supported:
(1) - Level 1= Data Access and Display
(2) - Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides and Commands
(3) - Level 3 = Level 2 + Database Generation and Modification
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 30
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
5.
6.
B.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
c. A minimum of 4 passwords shall be supported at each Digital Panel.
d. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective
passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device shall be limited to only
those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.
e. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1-60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line.
Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands
including, but not limited to the following:
a. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment
b. Adjust setpoints
c. Add/Modify/Delete time programming
d. Enable/Disable process execution
e. Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point
f. Enable/Disable Totalization for each point
g. Enable/Disable Trending
h. Enter temporary override schedules
i. Define Holiday Schedules
j. Change time/date
k. Enter/Modify analog alarm limits
l. Enable/Disable demand limiting
m. Enable/Disable duty cycle.
Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated manually, and directed to the displays. As a
minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports:
a. A general listing of all points in the system shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(1) - Points currently in alarm
(2) - Off-line points
(3) - Points currently in override status
(4) - Points in Weekly Schedules
(5) - Holiday Programming
b. Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-selected group of groups or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware
configuration of the facility management system.
c. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller
to obtain system information.
System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification
procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.
1. The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to
allow an operator to independently perform the following functions:
a. Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers
b. Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning
constants
c. Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point.
d. Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications
e. Add/Delete/Modify time—and calendar—based programming.
f. Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point
g. Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point.
h. Add/Delete/Modify configured control processes
i. Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition
j. Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords
k. Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 31
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.15
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, Application Specific
Controllers, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through
fill-in-the-blank templates.
a. Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be
restricted to a single ASC, but shall be able to include data from any and all other Application Specific Controllers to allow the development of network-wide control strategies.
System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall
be self-documenting to provide hard copy printouts of all configuration and application data.
Data Base Save/Restore/Back-up: Back-up copies of all ASC and digital Panel data bases
shall be stored in at least one personal computer or laptop. Users shall also have the ability to
manually execute downloads of an ASC or Digital Panel data base.
COLOR PACKAGE
1. Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled water systems, and hot water boiler systems, shall
be generated to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition. Generation of graphics shall be by the temperature control contractor.
2. System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various
system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text
based commands.
3. Data Displays: Dynamic temperature valves, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.
4. Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user
to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.
a. The BAS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g., fans, cooling coils, filters, dampers, etc.),
complete mechanical systems (e.g., constant volume-terminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and
electrical symbols.
b. The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following:
(1) - Define symbols.
(2) - Position and size symbols.
(3) - Define background screens.
(4) - Define connecting lines and curves.
(5) - Locate, orient and size descriptive text.
(6) - Define and display colors for all elements.
(7) - Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other
displays.
c. Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or
calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout, or any
other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in the analysis of the facility. To
accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data
from multiple application specific controllers.
d. Provide a minimum of 250 real time graphics. Submit to Engineer for approval.
UPS POWER
A.
B.
No local UPS will be provided. System will be connected to Building UPS. Provide local UPS
power for the Building Manager to allow for continued operation of the backend system upon
power loss until back-up power is on-line.
Local UPS shall be as manufactured by APC Back-UPS Pro 700, model BR700G or approved
equivalent.
1. Contractor shall verify required output capacity of UPS prior to purchasing.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 32
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
PART 3 - HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION PRACTICES FOR WIRING
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.3
All controllers are to be mounted vertically and per the manufacturer’s installation documentation.
The 120VAC power wiring to each Ethernet or Remote Site controller shall be a dedicated run,
with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral and ground wire. The
ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit
or device.
A true earth ground must be available in the building. Do not use a corroded or galvanized pipe,
or structural steel.
Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such that wiring does not droop.
Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by pipes, conduit, etc.
Conduit in finished areas, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces and
wall construction. Exception; metallic surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry
walls. All surface raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing finish within
the limitations of standard manufactured colors.
Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums,
furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit will run parallel to or at right angles to the
building structure.
Wires are to be kept a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water, steam, or condensate piping.
Where sensor wires leave the conduit system, they are to be protected by a plastic insert.
INSTALLATION PRACTICES FOR FIELD DEVICES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which products are to be installed in coordination with Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify General
Contractor in writing, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner, and Architect, of any
conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
When Installer confirms conditions as acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation and to
ensure requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied, submit to General Contractor written confirmation, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner, and Architect,
from applicable Installer. Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will
be assumed to indicate conditions are acceptable to Installer.
Well-mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good
heat transfer to the sensor.
Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give
smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke.
Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit
transients to 150% of the rated coil voltage.
Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they
are installed.
For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metal static pressure
probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure port shall be left open to the plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork.
For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into the space via a
metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building.
ENCLOSURES
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 33
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.6
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
For all I/O requiring field interface devices, these devices where practical will be mounted in a
field interface panel (FIP). The Contractor shall provide an enclosure which protects the device(s)
from dust, moisture, conceals integral wiring and moving parts.
FIPs shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and contactors, safety circuits, and
I/P transducers.
The FIP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish, NEMA 1 rated with a
hinged door and keyed lock. The enclosure will be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space.
All locks will be keyed identically.
All wiring to and from the FIP will be to screw type terminals. Analog or communications wiring
may use the FIP as a raceway without terminating. The use of wire nuts within the FIP is prohibited.
All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA-4 rating.
The tubing and wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring within controllers
shall be wrapped and secured.
Identify all control wires with labeling tape or sleeves using either words, letters, or numbers that
can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built drawings.
Identify all pneumatic tubing with labeling tape or sleeves using either words, letters, or numbers
that can be exactly cross referenced with as-built drawings.
All field enclosures, other than controllers, shall be identified with an engraved nameplate. The
lettering shall be in white against a black or blue background.
Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the BAS system.
All I/O field devices (except space sensors) that are not mounted within FIP's shall be identified
with name plates.
All I/O field devices inside FIP's shall be labeled.
LOCATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
The location of sensors is per mechanical and architectural drawings.
Space humidity or temperature sensors will be mounted away from machinery generating heat,
direct light and diffuser air streams.
Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in the outside air. Install
these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building or sunlight is minimized.
Field enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller panel(s) to which it is being interfaced.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1
GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
The control equipment and connecting wiring/tubing shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner by trained mechanics.
A complete copy of the control submittals shall remain at the job site during the entire period of
construction. Any changes made to the wiring diagrams or sequence of operation shall be recorded on this copy to reflect present, as-built conditions as they are performed.
All control devices shall be clearly marked with black phenolic labels. All labels shall be marked
as described in the "Control Device Identification" section of this specification.
Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration-free walls or freestanding angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room.
Provide nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and nameplates on cabinet face.
After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment. Submit data showing setpoints
and final adjustments of controls.
Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 34
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
G.
H.
4.2
VERIFICATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.3
B.
On completion of the installation, the Control Contractor shall arrange with the Balancing Contractor to completely adjust, set and make ready for use the entire control system including thermostats, valves, dampers and relays, fans etc.
The Control Contractor shall set up the relief fan dampers and speed controls in conjunction with
the Balancing Contractor to ensure proper building pressurization.
REMOVALS
A.
B.
4.6
Installation shall be carefully sequenced so as to minimize equipment downtime.
COORDINATION
A.
4.5
Verify that all systems are ready to receive work.
The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment locations, and
any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution
before rough-in work is started.
The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as show, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the Architect/Engineer for resolution before
rough-in work is started.
The Control System Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of
the work, and if head room or space conditions appear inadequate or if any discrepancies occur
between the plans and his work and the plans for the work of others, he shall report such discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to
accommodate his work with the work of others.
SCHEDULING OF WORK
A.
4.4
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and grounds.
All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry specifications and
standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.
Unless specifically noted to the contrary, removed materials shall not be reused in the work. Salvaged materials that are to be reused shall be stored safe against damage and turned over to the
appropriate trade for reuse.
Work that has been cut or partially removed shall be protected against damage until covered by
permanent construction.
WIRING, CONDUIT, TUBING AND CABLE
A.
B.
C.
D.
All wire will be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed below:
Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and
communications wiring may be run in the same conduit.
Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code.
Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum 1/2 inch galvanized EMT. Set screw fittings are acceptable for dry interior locations. Watertight compression fittings shall be used for exterior locations and interior locations subject to
moisture. Provide conduit seal-off fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between
areas of high temperature/moisture differential.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 35
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
E.
F.
G.
4.7
WIRING
A.
4.8
4.9
A.
Alarms for all systems are to be combined into three categories:
1. Temperature/Humidity which includes all items except the following
2. Equipment failure
3. MPS failure
B.
These three (3) pairs of alarm wires shall be run into Building Operations alarm panel for connection by Owner.
PENETRATIONS
C.
D.
All cutting, patching and repair work caused by Control Contractor shall be his responsibility and
shall be done by personnel skilled in the trade of the repair work. All such repairs shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer and Owner.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
4.12
Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BAS conduits and raceways.
All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using approved fire resistive sealant.
All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed raceway.
Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and
square.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
4.11
All field wiring work in connection with the control systems shall be provided by the Control
Contractor. The Control Contractor shall use approved detailed complete building riser diagrams
and terminal to terminal wiring diagrams to facilitate the field wiring work.
ALARM WIRING
A.
B.
4.10
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall
be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture.
Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment termination, and transitions from
EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal
four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location JH-boxes shall be cast alloy FS
boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.
Where the space above the ceiling is a supply or return air plenum, the wiring shall be plenum
rated. Teflon wiring can be run without conduit above suspended ceilings. EXCEPTION: Any
wire run in suspended ceilings that is used to control outside air dampers or to connect the system
to the fire management system shall be in conduit.
The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or workers, and
shall be liable for all damage thus caused.
The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally inspected, tested,
and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on-site that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign objects.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 36
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
A.
4.13
GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE LOCATION
A.
4.14
Install Site Specific Graphical User Interface LCD and Keyboard in the location indicated.
1. Location shall have a dedicated locked electrical circuit for use by this Contractor.
ETHERNET NETWORK CONNECTION
A.
B.
4.15
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Install all equipment in strict accordance with all directions and recommendations furnished by the
manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the Drawings and Specifications, report
such conflicts to the Engineer who shall resolve the conflict as required to meet the conditions of
the project.
All devices that require a connection to the LAN or access to an ISP shall be approved by the
owners Information Technology representative, prior to installation.
All ethernet communication connections shall be provided by the owner or General Contractor.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Comply with all Division 16 Installation Requirements.
Provide interlock wiring between supply and exhaust fans, electrical wiring for relays (including
power feed) for temperature and pressure indication.
Provide power wiring, conduit and connections for low temperature thermostats, high temperature
thermostats, alarms, flow switches, actuating devices for temperature, humidity, pressure and flow
indication, point resets and user disconnect switches for electric heating, appliances controlled by
this Section.
Provide all other wiring required for the complete operation of the specified systems.
Where required install all wiring raceway systems complying with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. All required conduit shall be installed in EMT.
Surge Protection and Lighting Protection
1. All equipment and all communication media shall be suitably protected from damage associated with electrical surge and lightning strike. Submittal and approval is required for all such
devices.
2. All input-output hardware and instrumentation located outdoors shall be isolated using approved surge suppression devices.
3. All telephone modem connections shall be isolated using approved surge suppression devices.
4. All building-to-building communication connections shall be isolated using approved surge
suppression devices.
All temperature control panels and controllers shall be provided with a control power transformer
with fuse protection on both the primary and secondary sides.
Provide electrical disconnecting means for servicing, for each control panel, digital controller,
router, transformer, power supply, and other devices that are served by 120VAC or higher voltage.
Enclosures shall be fabricated of 14ga. steel with sub-panels for component mounting and have
removable, hinged doors. Enclosures shall be sized to house the controllers, power supplies, transformers, relays, wire duct and miscellaneous equipment required to support the application. Enclosures shall be provided for all controllers that are not located within an OEM provided mechanical
equipment or on a VAV box.
Enclosure power supply shall provide at least one 40VA and one 100VA transformer with individual on/off switches and circuit breakers and two 120VAC outlets. Enclosures and power supplies
shall be UL listed Class II.
NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
1. BACnet network communication shall be via channels consisting of a 22 AWG unshielded
twisted pair in compliance with manufactures recommendations.
2. In all communication conduits, provide one spare twisted pair to be installed, tagged and labeled at each end.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 37
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
3.
4.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Communication conduits shall not be installed closer than six feet from high power transformers or run parallel within six feet of electrical high power cables. Care shall be taken to route
the cable as far from interference generating devices as possible.
There shall be no power wiring, in excess of 30 VAC rms, run in conduit with communications wiring.
L.
Input/Output Control Wiring
1. Platinum 1k ohm and 10k ohms thermistor type II wiring shall be two-wire or four-wire
twisted, shielded, minimum number 22 gauge.
2. Other analog inputs shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge, twisted, shielded.
3. Binary control function wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.
4. Analog output control functions shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge, twisted, shielded.
5. Binary input wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.
M.
Splices in shielded cables shall consist of terminations and the use of shielded cable couplers,
which maintain the integrity of the shielding. Terminations shall be in accessible locations. Cables
shall be harnessed with cable ties as specified herein.
Conduit and Fittings
1. Conduit for Control Wiring, Control Cable and Transmission Cable: Electrical metallic tubing
(EMT) with compression fittings, cold rolled steel, zinc coated or zinc-coated rigid steel with
threaded connections.
2. Outlet Boxes (Dry Location): Sheradized or galvanized drawn steel suited to each application,
in general, four inches square or octagon with suitable raised cover.
3. Outlet Boxes (Exposed to Weather): Threaded hub cast aluminum or iron boxes with gasket
device plate.
4. Pull and Junction Boxes: Size according to number, size, and position of entering raceway as
required by National Electrical Codes. Enclosure type shall be suited to location.
5. Install low voltage power and LON and LAN communication trunks in conduit in the following locations regardless of local building code allowances otherwise.
a. Mechanical rooms.
b. Electrical rooms.
c. Vertical risers (exception: fire rated continuous closet like a telephone closet).
d. Open Areas where the wiring will be exposed to view or tampering.
6. Conceal conduit within finished shafts, ceilings and wall as required. Install exposed conduit
parallel with or at right angles to the building walls.
N.
O.
Where Class 2 wires are in concealed and accessible locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may be used provided that:
1. Circuits meet NEC Class 2 (current-limited) requirements. (Low-voltage power circuits shall
be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current-limit.)
2. All cables shall be UL listed for application, i.e., cables used in ceiling plenums shall be UL
listed specifically for that purpose.
P.
Do not install Class 2 wiring in conduit containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and panels containing
high voltage may not be used for low voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two
(e.g., relays and transformers).
Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring to be run parallel along a surface or perpendicular to
it, and NEATLY tied at 3m (10 ft.) intervals.
All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal blocks or terminal strip. All wire-towire connections shall be at a terminal block, or with a crimped connector. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access and prevent restriction to devices
and terminals.
Plug or cap all unused conduit openings and stub-ups. Do not use caulking compound.
Q.
R.
S.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 38
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T.
U.
V.
W.
X.
Y.
4.16
Cap open ends of conduits until conductors are installed.
Where conduit is attached to vibrating or rotating equipment, flexible metal conduit with a minimum length of 18 inches and maximum length of 36 inches shall be installed and anchored in such
a manner that vibration and equipment noise will not be transmitted to the rigid conduit.
Where exposed to the elements or in damp or wet locations, waterproof flexible conduit shall be
installed. Installation shall be as specified for flexible metal conduit.
Provide floor, wall, and ceiling plates for all conduits passing through walls, floors or ceilings.
Use prime coated cast iron, split-ring type plates, except with polished chrome-plated finish in exposed finished spaces.
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
4.17
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
Route all conduit to clear beams, plates, footings and structure members. Do not route conduit
through column footings or grade beams.
Set conduits as follows:
1. Expanding silicone fire stop material sealed watertight where conduit is run between floors
and through walls of fireproof shaft.
2. Oakum and lead, sealed watertight penetration through outside foundation walls.
Temperature sensor assemblies shall be readily accessible and adaptable to each type of application in such manner as to allow for quick, easy replacement and servicing without special tools or
skills.
Strap-on mountings shall not be permitted.
Outdoor installations shall be; of weatherproof construction or in appropriate NEMA enclosures.
These installations shall be protected from solar radiation and wind effects. Protective shield shall
be stainless steel.
Sensors shall be with enclosure where located in finished space.
Sensors in ducts shall be mounted in locations to sense the correct temperature of the air only and
shall not be located in dead air spaces or positions obstructed by ducts, equipment, and so forth.
Locations where installed shall be within the vibration and velocity limit of the sensing element.
Ducts shall be securely sealed where elements or connections penetrate ducts to avoid measuring
false conditions.
All sensors measuring temperatures in pipes larger than 2 inches in diameter or in pressure vessels
shall be supplied with wells properly fabricated for the service. Wells shall be noncorrosive to the
medium being measured and shall have sufficient physical strength to withstand pressures and velocities to which they are subjected. Wells shall be installed in the piping at elbows where piping
is smaller than the length of the well to effect proper flow across the entire area of the well.
All field sensors, transmitters, actuators, switches, etc. shall be field calibrated. The calibration
shall be guaranteed for the period of the control system warranty. Any corrections or re-calibration required during the warranty will be performed at no cost to Owner. Calibration methods,
means, instruments, and standards shall be in strict accordance with ISO-9000 standards
CONTROL VALVES, CONTROL DAMPERS AND ACTUATORS
A.
Control Valves.
1. Control valves shall be installed by the Div. 23 contractor.
2. Coordinate with the Div. 23 contractor and verify that each control valve can be serviced, including adjustment and removal of the actuator.
3. All control valves shall have unions installed at each inlet and outlet to permit removal of the
valve for servicing.
4. Valves shall be installed with stems vertical where possible. Where space conditions require
valves to be mounted with stems greater than 45° off vertical the actuator shall be externally
supported. In no case will the control valve be mounted with the stem greater than 90° off of
vertical.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 39
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
B.
4.18
ACCESS DOORS
A.
4.19
B.
C.
D.
Securely mount all control panels and enclosures to wall or structure using bolts, anchors, etc.
Mount enclosures and control panels with top at 60 inches above finished floor, unless noted otherwise. Field fabricate enclosure mounting rack from Unistrut or Kindorf, where required. Locate
enclosures and control panels to ensure full door swing.
Seal all conduit entrances into enclosures and control panels, water tight.
Locate enclosures indoors where possible. Provide drains and block heaters for all panels located
outdoors.
Identification of Hardware and Wiring
1. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels shall be labeled at each
end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other descriptive information.
2. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument or item
served.
3. Identify control panels with minimum 1 inch letters on nameplates.
4. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match record
documents.
5. Affix engraved tags plates on each motor starter controlled through the EMS. Minimum tag
size shall be 1 in. X 3 in. Minimum lettering size shall be 3/16 in. high. Tag shall be red with
white lettering. Tags shall indicate the following:
a. C A U T I O N
b. This equipment is operating under automatic
c. Control and may start at any time without warning
6. Identify room sensors relating to terminal box or valves with nameplates.
CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
4.21
Div. 23 Contractor shall provide access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for
service to control equipment.
INSTRUMENT ENCLOSURES AND CONTROL PANELS
A.
4.20
Control Dampers.
1. Control dampers shall be installed by Div. 23 contractor.
2. Coordinate with the Div. 23 contractor the service access requirements of the control dampers, and verify that each control damper can be serviced, including adjustment and removal of
the actuator.
3. Div. 23 Contractor shall provide necessary blank-off plates required for installation of reduced-size dampers (dampers that are smaller than duct size).
4. Furnish interconnecting hardware, linkages, etc. for installation of multiple section dampers
by Div. 23 Contractor.
This contractor shall clean up all debris resulting from his or her activities daily. The contractor
shall remove all cartons, containers, crates, etc. under his control as soon as their contents have
been removed. Waste shall be collected and placed in a location designated by the Construction
Manager or General Contractor.
At the completion of work in any area, the Contractor shall clean all of his/her work, equipment,
etc., making it free from dirt and debris, etc.
At the completion of work, all equipment furnished under this Section shall be checked for paint
damage, and any factory-finished paint that has been damaged shall be repaired to match the adjacent areas. Any metal cabinet or enclosure that has been deformed shall be replaced with new material and repainted to match the adjacent areas.
RECORDING CHANGES
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 40
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
A.
4.22
TESTING AND START UP
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.23
Plastic laminates shall be provided upon project completion, incorporating any field changes.
ADJUSTMENTS, SERVICE AND GUARANTEE
A.
4.26
Contractor shall assist commissioning agent in commissioning the equipment.
Refer to Commissioning specifications 01 91 00 “Commissioning” and 23 08 00 “Start-Up and
Commissioning” for additional requirements.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A.
4.25
Conduct all tests and adjustments of controls immediately upon installation. Controls Contractor
shall completely test the entire system prior to final start-up.
All field changes required for proper operation shall be made prior to final start-up. Final start-up
shall be conducted in presence of owner as specified in Start-up and Commissioning.
Contractor shall demonstrate that equipment is controlled as scheduled in the Equipment Control
Modes Schedule and specified in the Sequences of Operation.
Microprocessor control shall be demonstrated via a remote terminal located adjacent to the equipment being tested. Terminal shall be connected to nearest phone jack in the building via modem.
Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment and wiring to achieve this testing configuration.
COMMISSIONING
A.
B.
4.24
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
During construction, keep a record on a clean set of prints of all deviations and changes in the
Work shown on the Contract Drawings. Record these deviations and changes daily as they occur.
Immediately upon completion of the installation, the Control Contractor shall completely adjust all
control equipment, program and test all equipment for proper sequence of operation. The system
shall be placed in operation subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Control Contractor shall
guarantee the control system installed to be free from defects in workmanship and material under
normal use and service for a period of one years after acceptance by the Owner. Any defects in
workmanship or material during this time shall be corrected by the Control Contractor at no
charge to the Owner.
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION/ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE
A.
General. - Acceptance of the control system depends in part upon successful demonstration of
control system performance. The SI shall prepare a detailed final functional test and verification
plan indicating in a step-by-step logical fashion the procedures by which the control system will
be tested. This shall include the following procedures:
1. Sequence of Operation - Demonstrate all sequences of operation.
2. Test Documentation - Provide standard formatted documentation for each controlled system
and element test.
3. Pre-Testing - The control system installer shall have performed pre-testing of all tests on all
components before final testing. If during final testing more than 10 percent of the points or
sequences checked are found to be faulty, the Contractor shall halt the test and re-check all
parts of the system test.
4. Testing Plan. Submit test plan for approval not less than 4 weeks prior to tests. Meet with
Owner’s representative, discuss the test plan, and make necessary revisions. The test plan
shall include, as a minimum, for each control system and sub-system the following:
a. System name.
b. List of devices with brief description of functional purpose of each.
c. The expected signal values transmitted by the sensors/transmitters.
d. The expected signal values transmitted by the controller to the controlled device or actuator.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 41
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
5.
6.
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
e. The expected values of the control medium from limit-to-limit.
f. A description of the instrumentation required to test the system, including proof of calibration.
g. A detailed step-by-step process in conducting test and verification.
h. Log sheets on which expected and actual values will be recorded.
i. Other criteria for test to indicate that the system is operating in accordance with Contract
requirements.
Testing - Inform the Engineer and Owner of all test dates for attendance, so that the Engineer
and/or Owner may attend the test if desired. Perform all tests. Correct all system maladies
found in the testing procedure. Retest as required. If Owner’s representative does not witness
test, provide performance certification.
Acceptance - The control systems will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of Completion until all tests described in this specification have been performed to the satisfaction of
both the Engineer and Owner. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor may be exempt from the completion requirements if stated
as such in writing by the Owner's representative.
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 42
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
APPENDIX A
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 43
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 – MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
“BUILDING - A” – NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
230923 – Page 44
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SECTION 26 32 13 – NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM & SITE
Provide a fully enclosed weather proof and sound attenuated 400 kW/500kVA packaged engine-generator
standby power system to supply electrical power at 480/277 Volts, 60 Hertz, 3 Phase, 4-wire. The generator
shall consist of a liquid cooled spark-ignited engine, a synchronous AC alternator, and system controls with all
necessary accessories for a complete operating system, including but not limited to the items as specified
hereinafter. The engine-generator stand-by power shall be provided with a single generator set, paralleled
generator set shall not be permitted.
REFERENCES
A.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
2. NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
B.
National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)
1. NEMA MG-1 Motors and Generators
C.
Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
1. UL 2200
Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies
D.
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
1. IEEE 446 Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and
Industrial Applications
1.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.5
A.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
An electric generating system, consisting of a prime mover, generator, governor, coupling and all controls, must
have been tested, as a complete unit, on a representative engineering prototype model of the equipment to be
sold.
The generator set must conform to applicable NFPA requirements.
The generator set shall be listed under Underwriters Laboratories listing (UL2200) for a stationary engine
generator assembly.
Spark-ignited generators are required to meet EPA emission guidelines. Generator shall be pre-certified from
the manufacturer.
The generator set must be pre-certified to meet EPA federal emission requirements for stationary standby.
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 260530- Conduit, Boxes, Wireway and Fittings
Section 260519- Wire, Cable and connectors.
Section 260800- Start-up and Commissioning
Section 262116- Panelboards
MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS
This system shall be supplied by an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) who has been regularly engaged in
the production of engine-alternator sets, and associated controls for a minimum of 25 years, thereby identifying
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 1
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
B.
C.
1.6
one source of supply and responsibility. Acceptable suppliers are Kohler Power Systems, Cummins Onan, and
Caterpillar Inc.
The manufacturer shall have printed literature and brochures describing the standard series specified, not a one
of a kind fabrication.
Manufacturer’s authorized service representative shall meet the following criteria:
1. Certified, factory trained, industrial generator technicians
2. Service support 24/7
3. Service location within 75 miles
4. Response time of 4 hours
5. Service & repair parts in-stock at performance level of 95%
6. Offer optional remote monitoring and diagnostic capabilities
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Emergency generator sets rated continuous standby (defined as continuous for the duration of any power outage)
at the following capacities:
1. Generator rating specified at 0.8 power factor for standby applications.
2. Generator Characteristics:
a.
Power Ratings (kVA/kW) as indicated on the Contract Drawings
b.
All units shall conform to:
1 Voltage (Grounded Wye) 480Y/277
2 Phase
3
3 No. Of Service Wires
4
4 Solid Ground
5 105 degree C rise alternator
B.
Load Starting Requirements: The generator shall be capable of starting the loads as indicated in the Single Line
Diagram, AND Panel Schedules included in the Contact Drawings as well as 10% of additional. Maximum
voltage drop on application of this load, considering both alternator performance and engine speed changes shall
not exceed 15%.
The engine generator sets shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems and shall start
and accept load in 10 seconds.
The generator set shall be UL 2200 listed.
The generator set shall be certified to meet the seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC).
Refer to Contract Drawings for project seismic design criteria.
C.
D.
E.
1.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
SUBMITTALS
Procedure: Comply with submittal requirements indicated below and as stipulated in 013300 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES.
Product Data General: Submit manufacturer’s product literature, technical specifications, application
instructions, product storage and handling requirements, and similar data for each product specified below as
required to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements and provide complete application information.
Product Data: Provide information for each type of product specified.
Shop Drawings:
1. Submit six (6) sets of bound submittals including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Standard manufacturer’s printed specification sheet showing critical engine and generator set
specifications including dimensions, weights, guaranteed fuel consumption at 25%, 50%, 75%
and 100% of full rated load, engine BHP available, jacket water heat rejection, cooling pump
characteristics, exhaust flow rate and temperature at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of rated load,
ventilation requirements, combustion air requirements, cooling system static head pressure
limitation, exhaust backpressure limitation, rolling ampere rate for electric starting, liquid refill
capacities, generator efficiency at 50%, 75% and 100% load, generator set ventilation
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 2
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
b.
requirements, TIF, harmonic wave distortion, transient reactance (x’d), type of winding
insulation, generator temperature rise, regulation characteristics, generator type of construction
and over speed capabilities.
Engine and generator material composition and construction.
E.
Manufacturer’s printed warranty statement of the engine and generator set showing single source responsibility
by the genset supplier.
a.
Drawing and wiring schematics for right hand, left hand, end and top views of proposed
assembly; battery rack, control cubicle, radiator, pump, heat exchanger, isolators, muffler, and
flexible fittings.
b.
Accessory catalog cuts including the vibration isolators, flexible exhaust coupling, muffler,
batteries battery charger, mainline circuit breaker and enclosure, engine manufacturer’s shutdown
contactors, fuel lines, jacket water heater, and pump. Include a detailed statement concerning nonengine-generator set manufacturer’s warranty policies, dealers responsibility, and duration of
policy.
c.
Submit manufacturer’s pump specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and pump
characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. Submit shop drawings,
wiring diagrams and maintenance data including spare parts listed for each pump.
d.
Normal operating ranges for system’s temperature, pressure, and speed.
e.
Manufacturer’s engine and generator operation guide, parts book, service manual, warranty policy
and installation guide.
f.
Controls specification sheet(s)
g.
Installation / Layout dimensional drawing
h.
Wiring schematic
i.
Sound data: sound level in dBA at 23 ft based on the configuration specified.
j.
Emission certification
F.
Sustainability / Environmental Submittals: Show evidence including but not limited to the following:
1. Recycled content – documentation showing product supports pre and post - consumer content.
2. Indoor Environmental Quality - product is VOC compliant in the state and jurisdiction the project is
located.
3. Proposed products are manufactured within a 500-mile radius of the project site and are considered to be
a locally produced material which supports regional materials and resources.
4. Comply with recycling program and waste management procedures.
G.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with the applicable sections noted in DIVISION 01, including but
limited to the following:
1. Requirements of 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
2. Submission of maintenance instructions described in 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
DATA;
3. Record documents as described in 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS;
4. Demonstration and training requirements indicated in 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING.
H.
NFPA 110 required AHJ documentation:
1. Proto type test report; Certification of torsional compatibility; NFPA compliance statement; and
Certification of rated load testing Applications with emergency system loads (NEC 700) require breaker
coordination. To facilitate coordination, the following information needs to be incorporated into the
submittal.
a.
Alternator thermal damage and decrement curves.
b.
Generator protective device time-current curves.
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 3
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
ENGINE RATING AND PERFORMANCE
Basis of design:
1. The prime mover shall be a liquid cooled, spark-ignited, 4-cycle engine. It will have adequate
horsepower to achieve rated kW output.
2. The engine shall support a 100% load step.
3. The generator system shall support generator start-up and load transfer within 10 seconds.
4. The generator shall accept a load step of 100% of rated kW with a maximum frequency dip of 12 Hz.
B.
C.
2.2
Obtain packaged generator set and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.
Generator set shall be standard offering from manufacturer.
Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Kohler Power Systems
2. Caterpillar Power Systems
3. Cummins Power Systems
4. Or equal approved.
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM
A.
Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have a
replaceable oil filter(s) with internal bypass and replaceable element(s).
B.
The engine oil pan will contain a 120vac thermostatically controlled crankcase oil heater.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine shall be cooled with a unit mounted radiator, fan, water pump, and closed coolant recovery system.
The coolant system shall include a coolant fill box which will provide visual means to determine if the system
has adequate coolant level. The radiator shall be designed for operation in 122 degrees F, (50 degrees C)
ambient temperature. For very cold environments, modify block heater requirements to support additional block
heating requirements.
The engine shall have (a) unit mounted, thermostatically controlled water jacket heater(s) to aid in quick
starting. The wattage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The wattage shall be upsized to support
very cold environments. Block heater wattage to be submitted. For engines, 400 kW and larger, the block
heater shall utilize a circulating pump.
Engine coolant and oil drain extensions, equipped with pipe plugs and shut-off valves, must be provided to the
outside of the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine servicing.
A radiator fan guard must be installed for personnel safety that meets UL and OSHA safety requirements.
ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM
Starting shall be by a solenoid shift, DC starting system.
The engine’s cranking batteries shall be lead acid. The batteries shall be sized per the manufacturer’s
recommendations. The batteries supplied shall meet NFPA 110 cranking requirements of 90 seconds of total
crank time. Battery specifications (type, amp-hour rating, cold cranking amps) to be provided in the submittal.
The genset shall have an engine driven, battery charging alternator with integrated voltage regulation.
Thermostatically controlled battery blanket heaters are to be provided to maximize the batteries cold cranking
capabilities.
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 4
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.8
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.9
A.
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM
The engine shall be configured to operate on pipe line grade natural gas.
The engine shall be configured to operate in a dual fuel configuration. Natural gas is to be the primary fuel. If
natural gas pressure is lost, the unit shall automatically switch-over to LP vapor fuel.
The engine shall utilize a fuel system inclusive of carburetor, gas regulator, low gas pressure switch, and fuel
shut-off solenoid. Generators larger than 80 kW are to include air-fuel-ratio control.
The engines internal fuel connections shall be terminated to the generator frame via an NPT fitting for easy
installation.
ENGINE CONTROLS
Engine speed shall be controlled with an integrated isochronous governor function with no change in alternator
frequency from no load to full load. Steady state regulation is to be 0.25%.
To support EPA emission requirements, gensets larger than 80 kW will incorporate an active air-fuel-ratio
controller. The air-fuel-ratio controller shall be integrated into the generator controller to ensure security of
settings and to support monitoring and remote diagnostics. External air-fuel-ratio controllers are not acceptable.
Engine sensors used for monitoring and control are to be conditioned to a 4-20ma signal level to enhance noise
immunity.
All engine sensor connections shall be sealed to prevent corrosion and improve reliability.
HEATERS:
An engine mounted, thermostatically controlled immersion type engine water jacket heater to be provided to
insure maintaining engine block coolant temperature in the range of 120 to 140 degrees F (49 to 60 degrees C).
1. Heater to be suitable for operation on 208 volts AC power.
2. Heater shall include a lube oil pressure switch for automatic cut-out on engine start.
3. Provide isolation ball valves on water jacket heaters.
Generator winding anti-condensation strip heater, 120 volts A.C. thermostatically controlled. Factory wired to
the generator panelboard. Wattage as per manufacturer's recommendations.
Generator control panel heater, 120 volts A.C. thermostatically controlled. Factory wired to the generator
panelboard. Wattage as per manufacturer's recommendations.
Battery heater, 120 volts A.C. thermostatically controlled. Factory wired to the generator panelboard. Wattage
as per manufacturer's recommendations.
ENGINE EXHAUST AND INTAKE
The engine exhaust emissions shall meet the EPA emission requirements for standby power generation.
For generators larger than 80 kW, the engine will incorporate a 3-way catalytic convertor to meet EPA emission
requirements.
The manufacturer shall supply its recommended stainless steel, flexible connector to couple the engine exhaust
manifold to the exhaust system. A rain cap will terminate the exhaust pipe after the silencer. All components
must be properly sized to assure operation without excessive back pressure when installed.
The manufacturer shall supply a critical grade exhaust silencer as standard. For applications with site specific
sound requirements (reference section 1.1), the silencer shall be selected to achieve site sound levels.
All exhaust piping from the turbo-charger discharge to the silencer shall be thermally wrapped to minimize heat
dissipation inside the enclosure.
The engine intake air is to be filtered with engine mounted, replaceable, dry element filters.
ALTERNATOR
The alternator shall be the voltage and phase configuration as specified in this section, and on the drawings.
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 5
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.10
A.
B.
C.
2.11
A.
B.
C.
D.
The alternator shall be a 4-pole, revolving field, stationary armature, synchronous machine. The excitation
system shall utilize a brushless exciter with a three phase full wave rectifier assembly protected against
abnormal transient conditions by a surge protector. Photo-sensitive components will not be permitted in the
rotating exciter.
The alternator shall include a permanent magnet generator (PMG) for excitation support. The system shall
supply a minimum short circuit support current of 300% of the rating (250% for 50Hz operation) for 10 seconds.
Three phase alternators shall be 12 lead, broad range capable of supporting voltage reconnection. All leads
must be extended into a NEMA 1 connection box for easy termination. A fully rated, isolated neutral
connection must be included by the generator set manufacturer.
The alternator shall use a single, sealed bearing design. The rotor shall be connected to the engine flywheel
using flexible drive disks. The stator shall be direct connected to the engine to ensure permanent alignment.
The alternator shall meet temperature rise standards of UL2200 (120 degrees C). The insulation system material
shall be class "H" capable of withstanding 150 degrees C temperature rise.
The alternator shall be protected against overloads and short circuit conditions by advanced control panel
protective functions. The control panel is to provide a time current algorithm that protects the alternator against
short circuits. To ensure precision protection and repeatable trip characteristics, these functions must be
implemented electronically in the generator control panel -- thermal magnetic breaker implementation are not
acceptable.
An alternator strip heater shall be installed to prevent moisture condensation from forming on the alternator
windings. A tropical coating shall also be applied to the alternator windings to provide additional protection
against the entrance of moisture.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
Generator mounted main line molded case circuit breakers as shown on the Contract Drawings shall be provided
for each unit. Circuit breakers shall be sized as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Circuit breakers shall be 100 percent rated, solid state trip type with true RMS electronic trip unit and the
following adjustable trip unit functions:
1. Long time pickup and delay
2. Short time pickup and delay
3. Instantaneous pickup
4. Ground fault pre-alarm (No trip)
All circuit breakers shall be provided with auxiliary contacts to indicate the position of the circuit breaker. The
auxiliary contact shall be factory wired to provide a “Generator Circuit Breaker Opened” alarm at the control
panel and at the remote annunciator.
CONTROLS
The generator control system shall be a fully integrated microprocessor based control system for standby
emergency engine generators meeting all requirements of NFPA 110 level 1.
The generator control system shall be a fully integrated control system enabling remote diagnostics and easy
building management integration of all generator functions. The generator controller shall provide integrated
and digital control over all generator functions including: engine protection, alternator protection, speed
governing, voltage regulation, air-fuel-ratio control (as required) and all related generator operations. The
generator controller must also provide seamless digital integration with the engine’s electronic engine control
module (ECM) if so equipped. Generator controller’s that utilize separate voltage regulators and speed
governors or do not provide seamless integration with the engine management system are considered less
desirable.
The control system shall provide an environmentally sealed design including encapsulated circuit boards and
sealed automotive style plugs for all sensors and circuit board connections. The use of non-encapsulated boards,
edge cards, and pc ribbon cable connections are considered unacceptable.
Circuit boards shall utilize surface mount technology to provide vibration durability. Circuit boards that utilize
large capacitors or heat sinks must utilize encapsulation methods to securely support these components.
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 6
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Gensets must be maintained to remain reliable. Predictive maintenance algorithms help ensures that this
maintenance work gets performed.
A predictive maintenance algorithm that alarms when maintenance is required. The controller shall have the
capability to call out to the local servicing dealer when maintenance is required.
Diagnostic capabilities are critical to minimize mean time to repair (MTTR). Time stamped alarms and event
logs are essential to perform diagnostic recreation of cascading events. Strip chart (data logging & graphing)
capability is essential in evaluating genset performance.
Diagnostic capabilities shall include time-stamped event and alarm logs, ability to capture operational
parameters during events, simultaneous monitoring of all input or output parameters, callout capabilities,
support for multi-channel digital strip chart functionality and .2 msec data logging capabilities.
System level protection is critical to any power system. Instantaneous and steady state protective trip points are
essential to creating system level protection. Without this functionality, under-voltage protection may need to
be set low to accommodate a motor start and then provide no protection to a steady state “brown-out” undervoltage condition.
In addition to standard NFPA 110 alarms, the application loads should also be protected through instantaneous
and steady state protective settings on system voltage, frequency, and power levels.
The control panel will display all user pertinent unit parameters including: engine and alternator operating
conditions; oil pressure and optional oil temperature; coolant temperature and level alarm; fuel level (where
applicable); engine speed; DC battery voltage; run time hours; generator voltages, amps, frequency, kilowatts,
and power factor; alarm status and current alarm(s) condition per NFPA 110 level 1.
Generator Set Alarm and Status Display: The generator set shall be provided with alarm and status indicating
lamps to indicate generator status, and existing alarm and shutdown conditions. The lamp condition shall be
clearly apparent under bright room lighting conditions. The generator set control shall include but not be limited
to the following alarm and shutdown conditions on the display panel:
1. Low oil pressure (Pre-alarm warning)
2. Low oil pressure (Shutdown and alarm)
3. Low coolant temperature (Pre-alarm warning)
4. High coolant temperature (Pre-alarm warning)
5. High coolant temperature (Shutdown and alarm)
6. Low coolant level (Pre-alarm warning)
7. Low coolant level (Shutdown and alarm)
8. High Battery Voltage (Pre-alarm warning)
9. Low Battery Voltage (Pre-alarm warning)
10. Emergency Stop Activated (Shutdown and alarm)
11. Overcrank (Shutdown and alarm)
12. Overspeed (Shutdown and alarm)
13. Ground fault (Pre-alarm warning)
14. Not-in-Auto (Pre-alarm warning)
15. Generator Circuit Breaker Opened (Pre-alarm warning)
16. The non-automatic indicating lamp shall be red, and shall flash to indicate that the generator set is not
able to automatically respond to a command to start from a remote location.
Furnish and install LED type remote alarm annunciator with horn, located as shown on the Drawings. The
remote annunciator shall provide all the audible and visual alarms called for by NFPA Standard 110 for level 1
systems; and in addition shall provide indications for gas pressure, high battery voltage, low battery voltage, and
generator circuit breaker opened. Spare lamps shall be provided to allow future addition of other alarm and
status functions to the annunciator. Provisions for labeling of the annunciator in a fashion consistent with the
specified functions shall be provided. Alarm silence and lamp test switch(es) shall be provided. LED lamps
shall be replaceable, and indicating lamp color shall be capable of changes needed for specific application
requirements. Alarm horn shall be switchable for all annunciation points. Alarm horn (when switched on) shall
sound for first fault, and all subsequent faults, regardless of whether first fault has been cleared, in compliance
with NFPA110.
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 7
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.13
A.
B.
C.
2.14
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
COMMUNICATION
Communications shall be supported with building automation via the Modbus protocol without network cards.
Internet and intranet connectivity shall be provided.
Communication shall be provided for serial, CAN, and Ethernet bus networks.
The control system shall provide pre-wired customer use I/O: 4 relay outputs (user definable functions),
communications support via RS232, RS485, or an optional modem. Additional I/O must be an available option.
Provide remote I/O device with (8) customer programmable discrete outputs for interfacing generator with BMS
system. I/O device shall be initially programmed at start-up to provide alarm indication for the following
alarms;
1. Engine Run
2. Loss of gas pressure
3. Engine Failure
4. 5 Spares
Customer I/O shall be software configurable providing full access to all alarm, event, data logging, and
shutdown functionality. In addition, custom ladder logic functionality inside the generator controller shall be
supported to provide application support flexibility. The ladder logic function shall have access to all the
controller inputs and customer assignable outputs.
ENGINE / ALTERNATOR PACKAGING
The engine/alternator shall be mounted with internal vibration isolation onto a welded steel base. These units
shall not need external vibration isolation for normal pad mounted applications.
A mainline, thermal magnetic electronic LSI circuit breaker carrying the UL mark shall be factory installed. The
breaker shall rated between 125% of the rated ampacity of the genset. The breaker shall be rated as shown on
drawings The line side connections are to be made at the factory. Output lugs shall be provided for load side
connections. The breaker is to include auxiliary contacts and shunt trip functionality.
The generator shall include a unit mounted 120 volt convenience outlet.
ENCLOSURE
The genset shall be packaged with a Level 2 sound attenuating weather protect enclosure.
The enclosure shall be completely lined with sound deadening material. This material must be of a self
extinguishing design.
The enclosure shall be made of aluminum with a minimum thickness of 14 gauge. The enclosure is to have
hinged, removable doors to allow access to the engine, alternator and control panel. The hinges shall allow for
door fit adjustment. Hinges and all exposed fasteners will be stainless steel or JS5000. The use of pop-rivets
weakens the paint system and not allowed on external painted surfaces. Each door will have lockable hardware
with identical keys.
The enclosure shall be coated with electrostatic applied powder paint, baked and finished to manufacturer's
specifications. The color will be manufacturer’s standard white.
The enclosure shall utilize an upward discharging radiator hood. Due to concerns relative to radiator damage,
circulating exhaust, and prevailing winds.
Gensets with silencers mounted inside the main generator compartment shall be thermally wrapped to minimize
heat stress on the surrounding components.
The enclosure shall include a thermostatically controlled space heater designed to maintain the enclosure at 40
degrees F.
A bolt-in-place removable wall panel shall be provided for maintenance and/or equipment installation.
The enclosure shall be provided with a 2” (51mm) high environmental protection barrier placed around the
electrical stub-up area and enclosure interior wall to help prevent liquid spill-over to the environment, a wall
mounted aluminum document holder, radiator cap access, and oil, fume and water drains to outside of enclosure.
The enclosure shall be provided with a 208/120 volt, single phase panelboard mounted in the enclosure with the
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 8
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
K.
L.
M.
2.15
A.
2.16
following factory wired:
1. Connections for battery charger, engine water jacket heater, generator anti-condensation strip heater,
generator control panel heater and battery heater, GFCI convenience receptacle and service light(s).
All electrical wiring shall be run in EMT conduit. Final connections to vibrating equipment shall be made with
liquid tight flexible metallic conduit.
Base: The engine-generator set shall be mounted on a heavy, duty steel base to maintain alignment between
components. The base shall include a battery tray with hold-down clamps within the rails.
Battery Charger:
1. UL listed 10 amp voltage regulated battery charger shall be provided for each engine-generator set. Input
AC voltage and DC output voltage shall be as required. Chargers shall be equipped with float, taper and
equalize charge settings. Operational monitors shall provide visual output along with individual form C
contacts rated at 4 amps, 120 VAC, 30VDC for remote indication of:
2. Loss of AC power - red light
3. Low battery voltage - red light
4. High battery voltage - red light
5. Power ON - green light (no relay contact)
6. Charger shall include an Analog DC voltmeter and ammeter, 12 hour equalize charge timer, and AC and
DC fuses
BATTERY CHARGING ALTERNATOR
Provide an engine driven battery charging alternator, minimum 35 amperes.
EXHAUST SYSTEM COMPONENTS:
A.
Provide following as part of generator set:
1. Gas-proof seamless ASA steel turbo ell with petcock for bleeding off any condensation that might
accumulate within the exhaust piping companion flange.
B.
Critical Silencer.
1. Silencer and tailpipe shall be painted with a high temperature black enamel, corrosion resistant coating.
2. All necessary high temperature insulation required for the silencer, and exhaust piping shall be furnished
and installed under this Section of the Contract.
C.
The enclosure shall be provided with an exhaust silencer, which is mounted inside of the enclosure, and allows
the generator set package to meet specified sound level requirements. Include muffler brackets and straps; rain
cap, collar and shield; flex pipe for muffler; and insulation for flex, muffler and exhaust pipe.
2.17
A.
B.
2.18
A.
B.
2.19
A.
LOOSE ITEMS
Supplier to itemize loose parts that require site mounting and installation to be performed by the Electrical
Contractor. Preference will be shown for gensets that factory mount items like mufflers, battery chargers, etc.
Flexible fuel hose for use in gas piping installation.
SPARE PARTS:
Fuses: One spare set
Filters One spare set (air, fuel, oil)
RADIATOR MOUNTED LOAD BANK
Generator package shall be provided with a radiator mounted load bank for automatic load control, periodic
exercising, and testing of the stand-by generator. The load bank shall be factory installed by the generator
manufacturer, or the generators manufacturer’s enclosure manufacturer, and arrive onsite fully installed and
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 9
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
operational. The load bank shall use the air discharge from the generator radiator for cooling.
Bases of design Avtron Load bank Inc. Equal products by other manufacturers may be submitted.
QUALITY CONTROL
1. The load bank shall be fully tested using a test specification written by the supplier. Tests shall include
electrical functional testing, verifying conformance to assembly drawings and specifications. Each load
step shall be cold resistance checked to verify proper calibration of resistive load steps and proper ohmic
value.
2. The manufacturer shall maintain this data on file for inspection purposes by the purchaser. Tests using
high potential equipment shall be performed to ensure isolation of the load circuits from the control
circuits and to determine isolation of the load circuits from the load bank frame. Tests of all safety
circuits shall be performed to verify conformance to the specification
3. All electrical circuits shall have a high potential insulation resistance test performed at twice rated
voltage plus 1000 VAC to assure insulation integrity.
4. All quality control test equipment shall be regularly maintained and calibrated to traceable national
standards.
5. The Company’s Quality System shall be ISO9001 Certified.
QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURER
1. The load bank shall be manufactured by a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of load banks and
who can demonstrate at least twenty five (25) years experience with at least twenty five (25) installations
of load banks similar or equal to the ones specified herein.
2. The manufacturer shall have a written Quality Control procedure available for review by the purchaser,
which will document all phases of operations, engineering, and manufacturing.
3. Manufacturer must have a field service organization with service personnel having a minimum of an
Associate Degree in Electrical Engineering.
RATINGS
1. The total capacity of the load bank shall be rated 200 KW at 480 Volts, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, 60 Hertz, 241
Amps per Phase at unity Power Factor.
2. The load step resolution shall be a nominal 20% of the load bank rating.
3. The load bank shall be designed for continuous duty cycle operation with no limitations.
4. Radiator load banks are designed as a supplemental load to the generator set, and shall be sized at 50% of
generator nameplate KW rating (not 100%).
MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION
1. The load bank shall be suitable for installation on the generator radiator core, or within the radiator
exhaust ductwork.
2. Due to the high radiator exhaust from the generator, the load bank shall be constructed of heavy gauge
aluminized steel per ASTM A463. Aluminized steel provides superior corrosion protection and extended
service life, with a better tolerance to high heat exposure compared to the more common Galvanized
steel.
3. The main input load bus, load step relays, fuses and control relays shall be located within the load bank
enclosure.
4. The load bank shall be designed for installation and operation outdoors. Load bank will be painted ASA61 grey and have a baked polyester powder coated finish with a film thickness of 2.8 +/- 0.4 Mils per
coat.
RESISTIVE LOAD ELEMENTS
1. Load elements shall be Avtron Helidyne™, helically wound chromium alloy rated to operate at
approximately ½ of maximum continuous rating of wire. Elements must be fully supported across the
entire length within the air stream by segmented ceramic insulators on stainless steel rods. Element
supports shall be designed to prevent a short circuit to adjacent elements or to ground.
2. The change in resistance due to temperature shall be minimized by maintaining conservative watt
densities.
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 10
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
3. The overall tolerance of the load bank shall be –0% to +5% KW at rated voltage. A –5%, +5% rating
allows the load bank to deliver less than rated KW and shall not be used. The load bank must deliver full
rated KW at rated voltage.
4. Sealed wire type elements (which have the internal resistance wire totally enclosed) prevent internal
cooling of the element wire and shall not be used.
COOLING
1. The engine generator shall provide sufficient air flow to cool the load bank. The load bank shall have a
static pressure drop of approximately 0.1” H2O at design velocity (850 ft/min). Manufacturer shall
coordinate load bank configuration with the radiator specifications.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES
1. An over-temperature switch shall be provided to sense the load bank exhaust. The switch shall be
electrically interlocked with the load application controls to prevent load from being applied in the event
of an over temperature condition.
2. To provide for major fault protection, branch fuses shall be provided on all three phases of switched load
steps above 50KW. Branch fuses shall be current limiting type with an interrupting rating of 200K A.I.C.
3. The exterior of the load bank shall have appropriate warning/caution statements on access panels.
CONTROL PANEL
1. The control panel shall be either local or remote panel mounted within the generator enclosure, with
unobstructed access through the enclosure’s standard access door. The control panel shall contain the
following manual controls:
2. Power ON/OFF switch
3. Master load ON/OFF switch.
4. Load step switches for ON/OFF application of individual load steps.
5. Control panel visual indicators shall be as follows:
6. Power ON indication light.
7. OVER-TEMPERATURE light.
An Automatic Load Step Controller shall be provided for maintaining a minimum load on the generator set. The
controller shall monitor the connected downstream loads and will automatically add or subtract load steps in
response to building load changes as to maintain a minimum load level on the generator set. The controller
includes an initial time-delay circuit, and automatic time delayed load step application circuit.
A standard remote load dump circuit shall be provided as part of the load bank control circuit. Provisions shall
be provided to remove the load bank off-line from the operation of a remote normally closed set of auxiliary
contacts from a transfer switch or other device. In the event of the remote contact opening, all load is removed.
DOCUMENTATION
1. Installation and operation manuals shall be provided with the equipment and shall include complete
details for the installation, commissioning, operation, and maintenance of the load bank.
2. The manuals shall include the electrical schematic and interconnect drawings for the power and control
wiring for the load bank and all control devices.
3. A complete parts list with part numbers, device identification, and rating shall be included in the
manuals. The original manufacturers name and part number shall be included in the parts listing.
4. Two (2) sets of manuals shall be provided with the load bank.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which products are to be installed in coordination with
Installer of materials and components specified in this Section and notify General Contractor in writing, with
copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner, and Architect, of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely
installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to Installer.
When Installer confirms conditions as acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation and to ensure
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 11
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
requirements for applicable warranty or guarantee can be satisfied, submit to General Contractor written
confirmation, with copies to the Owner’s Representative, Owner, and Architect, from applicable Installer.
Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will be assumed to indicate conditions are
acceptable to Installer.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
F.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
B.
3.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
FACTORY TESTING
Before shipment of the equipment, the engine-generator set shall be tested under rated load for performance and
proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. Tests shall include:
Verify voltage & frequency stability.
Verify transient voltage & frequency dip response.
Load test the generator for 30 minutes.
Load testing to be performed at rated power factor.
OWNER’S MANUALS
Three (3) sets of owner’s manuals specific to the product supplied must accompany delivery of the equipment.
General operating instruction, preventive maintenance, wiring diagrams, schematics and parts exploded views
specific to this model must be included.
COORDINATION
The Vendor shall direct the installing Contractor prior to and during installation, and field check the installation
to assure the equipment has been properly installed.
The installing Contractor shall coordinate the laying and pouring of the generator concrete pad with the
approved manufacturers’ shop drawings prior to the pouring at the equipment pad, to assure proper sizing.
The installing Contractor shall coordinate the location of the electrical conduits locations with the approved
manufacturers’ shop drawings prior to installation to assure the conduits are properly located.
The Vendor shall furnish all equipment specified herein, in conformance with the terms and conditions stated
and/or implied. The Vendor shall coordinate and verify the interface between each component provided to
assure they are compatible and will operate properly in conjunction with each other. Note: Contractor shall
maintain accurate field mark-up Drawings, these mark-up drawings will be delivered to the Engineer at the end
of the project for the creation of As-Builts.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Equipment shall be delivered to the site on just in time basis and shall be set in place upon delivering.
The Contractor shall coordinate equipment delivery and installation with Vendor.
INSTALLATION
Contractor shall install the complete electrical generating system including all external fuel connections in
accordance with requirements of NEC, NFPA, and the manufacturer’s recommendations as reviewed by the
Engineer.
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement
and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions.
Examine the contract drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under
this Section.
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site; coordinate work with other trades and related specification
sections. Schedule the work of this Section with the work of related trades so as not to delay job process.
Provide required templates and drawings as required to related trade for location of items covered under related
specification sections.
Install generator set as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, requirements of the
applicable electrical code and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 12
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
G.
H.
I.
3.7
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
3.8
A.
requirements.
Provide power and control wiring as required.
Set and level Generator enclosure on equipment pad. Electrical Contractor shall fasten the generator to the pad
as per manufacturers’ instructions for compliance with seismic requirements.
Electrical work shall be in accordance with applicable codes and shall be rated for hazardous area as required.
TESTING
On site acceptance testing shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems.
Prior to startup, the Contractor shall complete all visual and mechanical inspections recommended by NETA
ATS-2009 7.22.1 and 7.22.3.
All protective devices and control functions shall be set and adjusted.
A factory authorized representative shall be present during the start-up and testing.
Generator Performance testing: The following tests shall be conducted onsite and two (2) copies of the test
reports shall be furnished to the Owner. All tests and inspections to assure satisfactory operations of the units
shall be witness by authorized representatives of the Owner. The contractor shall provide all necessary
equipment and instruments to accomplish the tests. Tests shall be conducted as follows:
1. Start set and bring up to rated no load speed in the time recommended by the engine manufacturer and
record the time.
2. Allow set to run for approximately 15 to 20 minutes and check and record voltage regulator range. Take
and record reading of AC colts, frequency, speed and all engine instruments.
3. Load Test: It is desirable to run the load tests at 0.8 lagging power factor. The vendor may have only
resistive type loads and tests with unity power factor will be acceptable.
4. The set shall be operated at rated load, with lowest lagging power factor attainable approaching 0.8, for a
period of 4 hours. The following data shall be recorded at 30 minute intervals, starting at no load cold
machine and ending with no load hot machine: Ambient temperature; voltage, all three phases; line
current, all three phases; engine speed (RPM); engine jacket water temperature; engine lube oil
temperature; engine lube oil pressure; alternator starter temperature; and frequency (Hertz).
5. The set shall operate satisfactorily during the load tests without undue vibration, overheating or distress
and the output voltage and frequency shall remain within the limits specified. The voltage range and
frequency range shall be recorded during the 4 hour run.
6. Regulation: The set shall be operated and the load suddenly increased in ¼ of full load steps, with lowest
lagging power factor attainable approaching 0.8, to 100% rated load, and run at full load for a period of
four hours. At the end of the 4 hours the load shall be suddenly reduced in ¼ load steps to no load. The
following data shall be recorded at every ¼ load step and in 15 minute intervals during the four hour run
at rated load: alternator load (KW), voltage and current of each phase, engine speed and frequency.
7. Test overspeed shutdown. Record engine shutdown speed (RPM) for at least three (3) tests, one with cold
engine. (Overspeed shall be set for 110% synchronous speed).
a.
Test high water temperature shutdown and record shutdown temperature.
b.
Test low oil pressure shutdown and record shutdown pressure.
c.
Test over voltage shutdown and record shutdown voltage.
d.
Test low water level shutdown and record shutdown level.
SERVICE
Supplier of the genset and associated items shall have permanent service facilities in this trade area. These
facilities shall comprise a permanent force of EGSA certified and factory trained service personnel on 24 hour
call, experienced in servicing this type of equipment, providing warranty and routine maintenance service to
afford the owner maximum protection. Delegation of this service responsibility for any of the equipment listed
herein will not be considered fulfillment of these specifications. Service contracts shall also be available.
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 13
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3.9
A.
B.
3.10
A.
WARRANTY
The standby electric generating system components, complete genset and instrumentation panel shall be
warranted by the manufacturer against defective materials and factory workmanship for a period of five (5)
years. Such defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer's option, free of charge for parts,
labor and travel. Warranty shall provide provisions for the supply of a portable generator by the manufacturer in
the event repairs cannot be completed in 48 hours.
The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into service. Multiple
warranties for individual components (engine, alternator, controls, etc.) will not be acceptable. Satisfactory
warranty documents must be provided. Also, in the judgment of the specifying authority, the manufacturer
supplying the warranty for the complete system must have the necessary financial strength and technical
expertise with all components supplied to provide adequate warranty support.
STARTUP AND CHECKOUT
The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory trained
technicians to checkout the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time.
Verification of engine parameters within specification.
Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required.
Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator.
Perform a load test of the electric plant, ensuring full load frequency and voltage are within specification
by using building load.
6. Applications with NEC 700 emergency loads are generally required to comply with the installation and
acceptance requirements of NFPA 110, section 7.13.
7. Perform a load test for 1.5 hours using building load. In addition to the building load test, load the
generator at 30% for 30 minutes, 50 % for 30 minutes, and 100% for 60 minutes.
3.11
A.
B.
TRAINING
Training shall NOT be supplied by the start up technician at the time of start-up. A separate training session
shall be scheduled with NJTA. Training Plan must be provided in advance, and issued to NJTA for review and
approval prior to scheduling the training.
Refer to specification section 017900, Demonstration and Training
END OF SECTION 26 32 13
NATURAL GAS ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
263213 –Page 14
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
CONTRACT:T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
SECTION 27 51 23 - INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.3
A.
B.
C.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
This Section includes voice intercommunication systems that are independent of any public or
PBX telephone systems. It includes requirements for intercommunication system components
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Master stations.
b.
Intercom stations.
c.
Controls, amplifiers, and terminal equipment
d.
Power supplies
e.
Wiring
RELATED SECTIONS:
Division 100 of Standard Specification.
1.
Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping.
2.
Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating.
Section 26 05 30- Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
Section 26 05 53- Identification for Electrical Systems
Section 27 11 19- Structured Cabling for Communications Systems
Section 27 00 00- Comunications
Section 28 13 53- Access Control
Section 28 23 00- Video Surveillance Systems
REFERENCES
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Telecommunications Industry Association
(TIA)/Electronics Industry Alliance (EIA):
1.
EIA-160 Sound Systems.
2.
EIA-299-A
Loudspeakers, Dynamic Magnetic Structures, and Impedance.
3.
EIA-310-A
Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment.
4.
SE-101-A
Amplifiers for Sound Equipment.
5.
SE-103
Speakers for Sound Equipment.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1.
UL 50
Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental
Considerations.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC).
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following information for approval in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00,
Submittal Procedures:
Product Data:
1.
Submit Product Data, including catalog cuts, for all products provided for the electrical work of
this Contract and as specified in other Sections.
2.
Clearly indicate the usage of each product on each submittal
Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit Shop Drawings for the electrical work of this Contract as specified in other Sections.
Sustainability / Environmental Submittals: Show evidence including but not limited to the following:
1.
Recycled content – documentation showing product supports pre and post - consumer content.
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 51 23 – PAGE 1
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
CONTRACT:T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
2.
3.
4.
Indoor Environmental Quality - product is VOC compliant in the state and jurisdiction the project
is located.
Proposed products are manufactured within a 500-mile radius of the project site and are
considered to be a locally produced material which supports regional materials and resources.
Comply with recycling program and waste management procedures.
E.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with the applicable sections noted in DIVISION 01, including
but limited to the following:
1.
Requirements of 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.
2.
Submission of maintenance instructions described in 017823 OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA;
3.
Record documents as described in 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS;
4.
Demonstration and training requirements indicated in 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND
TRAINING.
1.5
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
Electrical contractor shall enlist the services of a systems integrations consultant/contractor for the final
engineering and preparation of installations drawings for the Security Access, Video Surveillance,
Intercommunications, and Structured Cabling systems. These specifications are meant as a standard of
quality of materials provided. The systems integrator shall meet with NJTA at the start of the project to
coordinate all aspects of the system requirements, and operation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications:
Testing Agency Qualifications:
1.
Use a NETA accredited testing agency, or approved equal, that is accredited for the region in
which the Contract work is performed.
2.
Submit the testing agency’s qualifications to the Engineer for approval.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
Perform all electrical work in conformance with the requirements of NFPA 70, the National
Electrical Code.
EIA Compliance: Comply with the following Electronics Industries Association Standards:
1.
Sound Systems, EIA-160.
2.
Loudspeakers, Dynamic Magnetic Structures, and Impedance, EIA-299-A.
3.
Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment, EIA-310-A.
4.
Amplifiers for Sound Equipment, SE-101-A.
5.
Speakers for Sound Equipment, SE-103.
UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 50.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry space in original containers. Protect products
from fumes and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage.
MAINTENANCE
Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1.
Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01
78 23, other Contract requirements, and as follows:
a.
Organize Operation and Maintenance Manuals by Specification Section and equipment
number as designated on the Contract Drawings.
b.
Include suppliers, supplier addresses, and supplier telephone numbers for the equipment
and products furnished.
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 51 23 – PAGE 2
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
CONTRACT:T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
c.
d.
60 days prior to the request for final payment, prepare and submit two copies of the
proposed Operation and Maintenance Manuals to the Engineer for approval.
Upon approval of the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit six corrected
copies as follows:
i
Submit six sets to the Engineer. The engineer will provide one copy to the facility.
ii
Place one set in the spare parts and fuse cabinet in the new electrical service
building
iii
Deliver the remaining four copies to the Owner.
iv
Insert final record drawings in each set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals at
Project Closeout.
1.9
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Prior to the installation of any equipment, material or wiring, the Contractor shall meet with the Owner to
review the planned installation.
Convene with Owner at the start of the project to review all system component requirements, and
sequence of operation for entire system prior to the purchase of any equipment.
Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
Conduct a pre-installation conference with all other trades that have work related to security, access
control, and video surveillance at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination
with other construction components and systems.
B.
C.
D.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
2.3
A.
B.
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
Commend, Incorporated
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:
General: Bases of design GE-300 IP Intercom Server as manufactured by Commend. Provide complete
and fully functional intercommunication systems using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings,
and performances as indicated. Use materials and equipment that comply with referenced standards and
manufacturers' standard design and construction, in accordance with published product information.
Coordinate the features of all materials and equipment so they form an integrated system, with
components and interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions.
Spares: Provide adequate capacity in equipment ratings, spare key or relay capacity, and spare terminal
and cable conductor quantities to increase number of stations in the future by 50 percent above those
indicated for the work of this project.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS:
General: Provide all solid-state modular equipment.
Master Stations: (Commend Series 811) Provide model EE872A as manufactured by Commend.
Provide the following minimum features and characteristics:
1.
Mounting for individual stations shall be desk as indicated.
2.
Switches, station selector, and talk-listen: Heavy-duty type with gold plated contacts rated for five
million operations.
3.
Capacity to accommodate number of stations as indicated, plus 50 percent.
4.
Volume control to regulate incoming volume.
5.
Light annunciation to identify calling stations and stations that are in use (busy). Call light
annunciation shall remain actuated until call is answered by master station.
6.
Momentary audible tone signal to announce an incoming call.
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 51 23 – PAGE 3
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
CONTRACT:T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
7.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Speaker-microphone to originate calls and receive replies from other stations. Speaker sensitivity:
at least 40 dB (EIA pressure rating).
8.
Ten-digit touch key selector to originate calls to other stations.
9.
Speaker-microphone to transmit calls and to receive incoming calls with at least 40 dB sensitivity
as a speaker (EIA pressure rating).
10.
Volume control to regulate incoming volume.
11.
Tone annunciation on all incoming calls.
12.
Busy lamp or busy tone to indicate when called station is busy and when all channels are in use.
13.
Reset control to cancel call and reset system for next call.
14.
Incoming call annunciation by visual and audible signal. Provide display to identify calling
station that remains until call is answered.
Central Control Cabinet:
1.
Lockable metal cabinet housing power supplies, amplifiers, system volume control, and other
switching and control devices required to provide conversation channels.
Speaker-Microphone Stations (Motorized Gates): Provide Commend Series ES831A or approved equal
with the following minimum characteristics and features:
1.
Mounting and Speaker Size: flush mounting, as indicated for individual stations.
2.
Speaker-microphone station at gate locations shall be mounted in equipment housing with access
control card reader. Refer to details on civil drawings.
3.
One button for local communication
4.
Faceplate of stainless steel with tamper- proof mounting screws.
5.
Sensitivity as a speaker (EIA pressure rating) of at least 40 dB for speakers less than 8 inches in
diameter, and at least 45 dB for speakers 8 inches or larger.
6.
Monitor lamp and recurring momentary tone to indicate an incoming call.
7.
Call-in switch mounted on speaker or in separate flush wall plate as indicated on faceplate to
provide call-in to master station.
8.
Privacy switch mounted on speaker face plate as indicated. When in "ON" position, switch shall
prevent transmission of sound from remote station, and when in "OFF" position, without further
switch manipulation, response can be made to incoming calls from anywhere within a 20-foot
radius of station.
Speaker-Microphone Stations (Elevator): Provide Commend Series ET 871A or approved equal with the
following minimum characteristics and features:
1.
Mounting and Speaker Size: Flush wall mounting in elevator car panel, as indicated for individual
stations. Coordinate installation with elevator contractor.
a.
Model ET 871A single button.
b.
One button for local communication
2.
Sensitivity as a speaker (EIA pressure rating) of at least 40 dB for speakers less than 8 inches in
diameter, and at least 45 dB for speakers 8 inches or larger.
3.
Monitor lamp and recurring momentary tone to indicate an incoming call.
4.
Call-in switch separate flush wall plate in elevator car to provide call-in to master station.
All-Call Amplifier: Provide unit with all solid-state devices and the following minimum features and
characteristics:
1.
Output Power: At least 0.5 watt RMS for each station connected to it in all-call mode of operation.
2.
Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 5 percent at rated output power with a load equivalent to
quantity of stations connected to it in all-call mode of operation.
3.
Signal-To-Noise Ratio: 60 dB, or greater, at rated output.
4.
Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 2 dB from 50 Hz to 12,000 Hz.
5.
Regulation: Maintains output level within 2 dB from full load to no load.
6.
Input sensitivity compatible with master stations and central equipment so amplifier delivers
full-rated output with a sound pressure level of less than 10 dynes per square centimeter impinging
on a master station's speaker-microphone or handset transmitter.
7.
Protection against amplifier damage in case of shorted or open output.
Wire and Cable: For general use, provide wire and cable with the following features:
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 51 23 – PAGE 4
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
CONTRACT:T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
1.
H.
I.
Conductors: Size signal conductors as recommended by manufacturer, but not smaller than
22-gage. Use jacketed single and multi-twisted pair, untinned solid copper conductors.
2.
Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32-inch thick.
3.
Shielding: Only where recommended by manufacturer; 34-gage tinned soft copper strands formed
into a braid or approved equivalent foil type. Shielding coverage on the conductors shall be not
less than 60 percent.
Plenum Cable: UL approved for plenum installation.
Weatherproof Equipment: Where equipment is indicated to be weatherproof, or is exposed to the
weather, provide items specifically designed and listed for such duty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
EXAMINATION
Examine conditions, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting the performance of the intercommunication system work.
1.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
General: Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. Install equipment in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Wiring Methods: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters, and except in
accessible ceiling spaces, and in gypsum board partitions, where cable wiring method may be used. Use
UL listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces including plenum ceilings. Conceal wiring except in
unfinished spaces.
Impedance and Level Matching: Carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal
interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.
Control Circuit Wiring: Install control circuits in accordance with NFPA 70 and as indicated. Provide
number of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide control functions indicated or
specified.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings so designed and
installed as not to damage the cables. Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more
than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
Wiring within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors
to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars.
Provide physical isolation from each other for speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power
wiring. Run in separate raceways, or where exposed or in same enclosure, provide 12 inch minimum
separation between conductors to speaker-microphones and adjacent parallel power and telephone
wiring. Provide physical separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer for other
intercommunication system conductors.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets and equipment enclosures.
Identification of Conductors and Cables: Use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable
marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in coordination with system wiring
diagrams.
Weatherproofing: Provide weatherproof enclosures for items to be mounted outdoors or exposed to
weather.
Repairs: Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for installation , repair,
restore, and refinish to original appearance.
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 51 23 – PAGE 5
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
CONTRACT:T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3.3
A.
B.
3.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
GROUNDING
Provide equipment grounding connections for intercommunication systems as indicated. Tighten
connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and
effective grounds.
Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the
greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other
impairments. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground
resistance.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of
the system.
Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform
complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements
of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are
achieved.
Testing: Upon completion of pretesting, notify the Architect a minimum of 10 days in advance, of
acceptance test performance schedule and conduct tests in his presence. Provide a written record of test
results.
Operational Test: Perform an operational system test to verify conformance of system to these
Specifications. Perform tests that include originating and page material at intercommunication stations
and observing sound reproduction for proper routing and volume levels and for freedom from noise and
distortion.
Frequency Response: Determine frequency response of two transmission paths including all-call and
paging by transmitting and recording audio tones. Minimum acceptable performance shall be within 3
dB from 150 Hz to 2,500 Hz.
1.
Signal-To-Noise Ratio Test: Measure the ratio of signal to noise of the complete system at normal
gain settings using the following procedure:
a.
Disconnect a speaker-microphone and replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using
a 1,000 Hz signal. Measure the ratio of signal to noise.
b.
Repeat the test for four speaker-microphones and for each separately controlled zone of
paging loudspeakers.
c.
The minimum acceptable ratio is 45 dB..
Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed signals at frequencies
of 150, 200, 400, 1000, and 25000 Hz into each intercommunications, paging and all-call amplifier, and
measure the distortion in the amplifier output. The maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is 5
percent total harmonics.
Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into the system using octaves centered at 4,000 and 500 Hz.
Use a sound level meter with octave band filters to measure the level at five locations in each zone. The
maximum permissible variation in level is plus or minus 3 dB and the levels between adjacent zones
must not vary more than plus or minus 5 dB.
Inspection: Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and interconnecting
wires and terminals are identified. Provide a list of final tap settings of paging speaker line matching
transformers.
Retesting: Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such
deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the
Specifications and complies with applicable standards.
Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and deterioration.
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 51 23 – PAGE 6
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1
CONTRACT:T500.355
FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS TO MAINTENANCE DISTRICT
TMD5 - MILLTOWN MILEPOST 81.0 SB
"BUILDING - A" - NEW MULTIUSE BUILDING
3.5
A.
B.
C.
TRAINING
Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a minimum of three
hours training.
Schedule training with Owner through the Engineer, with at least seven days advance notice.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by the Engineer within one year of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, resetting matching transformer taps,
and adjusting controls to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to the site for this
purpose.
END OF SECTION
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 51 23 – PAGE 7
ISSUED BY CHANGE OF PLAN #1